You are on page 1of 381

NetNumenM32

Integrated Network Operation System

Operation Manual
(Configuration Management)
Version 1.00

ZTE CORPORATION
ZTE Plaza, Keji Road South,
Hi-Tech Industrial Park,
Nanshan District, Shenzhen,
P. R. China
518057
Tel: (86) 755 26771900 800-9830-9830
Fax: (86) 755 26772236
URL: http://support.zte.com.cn
E-mail: doc@zte.com.cn

LEGAL INFORMATION
Copyright 2006 ZTE CORPORATION.
The content of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or
distribution of this document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written
consent of ZTE CORPORATION is prohibited. Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by
contractual confidentiality obligations.
All company, brand and prodsuct names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE
CORPORATION or of their respective owners.
This document is provided as is, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions
are disclaimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose,
title or non-infringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the
use of or reliance on the information contained herein.
ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications
covering the subject matter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE
CORPORATION and its licensee, the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter
herein.
ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice.
Users may visit ZTE technical support website http://ensupport.zte.com.cn to inquire related information.
The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.

Revision History
Date

Revision No.

Serial No.

Reason for Issue

Sep 18, 2007

R1.0

sjzl20072649

First edition

ZTE CORPORATION
Values Your Comments & Suggestions!
Your opinion is of great value and will help us in improving the quality of our
product documentation and to offer better services to our customers.
Please fax to (86) 755-26772236 or mail to Documentation R&D Department, ZTE
CORPORATION, ZTE Plaza, A Wing, Keji Road South, Hi-Tech Industrial Park,
Shenzhen, P. R. China 518057.
Thank you for your cooperation!
Document
Name

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) Integrated Network Operation System Operation Manual


(Configuration Management)

Product Version

V1.00

Document Revision
Number

Serial No.

sjzl20072649

Equipment
Installation Date

R1.0

Presentation:
(Introductions, Procedures, Illustrations, Completeness, Level of Detail, Organization,
Appearance)
Good
Your evaluation
of this
documentation

Fair

Average

Poor

Bad

N/A

Accessibility:
(Contents, Index, Headings, Numbering, Glossary)
Good

Fair

Average

Poor

Bad

N/A

Intelligibility:
(Language, Vocabulary, Readability & Clarity, Technical Accuracy, Content)
Good

Fair

Average

Poor

Bad

N/A

Please check the suggestions which you feel can improve this documentation:

Your
suggestions for
improvement of
this
documentation

Improve the overview/introduction

Make it more concise/brief

Improve the Contents

Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials

Improve the organization

Add more troubleshooting information

Include more figures

Make it less technical

Add more examples

Add more/better quick reference aids

Add more detail

Improve the index

Other suggestions
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
# Please feel free to write any comments on an attached sheet.

If you wish to be contacted regarding your comments, please complete the following:
Name

Company

Postcode

Address

Telephone

E-mail

This page is intentionally blank.

Contents
About This Manual .......................................................... xi
Purpose .............................................................................. xi
Intended Audience ............................................................... xi
Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge ............................................ xi
What Is in This Manual ......................................................... xi
Related Documentation........................................................ xii
Conventions .......................................................................xiii
How to Get in Touch............................................................xiv

Chapter 1.......................................................................... 1
System Introduction........................................................ 1
System Features................................................................... 1

System Interface ............................................................1


User login ............................................................................ 1
Creating an NE Agent ............................................................ 3
Accessing Configuration Management ...................................... 6
Screen Locking ..................................................................... 9
Showing System Time ......................................................... 10
Showing/Hiding Toolbar ....................................................... 11
Viewing System Information ................................................. 11
Showing/Hiding Status Bar ................................................... 13
Showing/Hiding Message Area .............................................. 14
User Logout ....................................................................... 14
System Exit ....................................................................... 15
Option Settings................................................................... 17
Print Setup ........................................................................ 19

Application Window Operations ....................................... 20


Menu Bar Dynamic Switchover .............................................. 20
Closing Current View ........................................................... 22
Closing All Views................................................................. 22

Chapter 2........................................................................ 25

Public Resource Configuration ......................................25


Creating GERAN Sub Network ............................................... 25
Deleting GERAN Sub Network................................................ 27
Creating BSC Managed Elements ........................................... 28
Creating BSC Function ......................................................... 31

Chapter 3........................................................................65
BSC Rack Configuration .................................................65
Creating a BSC Rack ............................................................ 65
Creating BSC Rack by Template ............................................ 67

Control Shelf Boards Configuration .................................. 68


Creating Control Shelf.......................................................... 68
Configuring OMP Board ........................................................ 70
Configuring UIMC Board (Control Shelf ................................... 72
Configuring CMP Board......................................................... 73
Configuring CLKG Board ....................................................... 75
Configuring CHUB Board....................................................... 76

Resource Shelf Boards Configuration................................ 78


Creating Resource Shelf ....................................................... 78
Configuring UIMU Board ....................................................... 81
Configuring SPB Board ......................................................... 83
Configuring DRTB Board ....................................................... 84
Configuring LAPD Board ....................................................... 87
Configuring BIPB Board ........................................................ 89
Configuring DTB Board......................................................... 90

Switching Shelf Boards Configuration ............................... 93


Configuring UIMC Board ....................................................... 94
Configuring PSN Board ......................................................... 96
Configuring GLI Board.......................................................... 97

BSC Board Operations ................................................... 99


Deleting/Querying/Modifying BSC Board ................................. 99

Chapter 4......................................................................103
A Interface Configuration ............................................103
Configuring Local Office...................................................... 103
Configuring Adjacent Office................................................. 106

No.7 Office Configuration ............................................. 117


Configuring No.7 Route ...................................................... 117

Creating No.7 Office .......................................................... 118


Configuring Office Guide .................................................... 124

Configuring SIGTRAN................................................... 130


Configuring Application Server Process................................. 130
Configuring M3UA ............................................................. 135
Configuring SUA ............................................................... 137

Chapter 5......................................................................139
Gb Interface Configuration..........................................139
Configuring NSE ............................................................... 139
Configuring BRCH ............................................................. 140
Configuring NSVC ............................................................. 143

Chapter 6......................................................................145
Site Configuration ........................................................145
Configuring Site................................................................ 145
Configuring B8018 ............................................................ 147
Configuring B8112 ............................................................ 162
Configuring M8202 ............................................................ 164
Configuring M8206 ............................................................ 166
Configuring BS20 .............................................................. 168
Configuring BS21 (V2.0 ..................................................... 174
Configuring BS30 V1.2....................................................... 176
Configuring BS30 .............................................................. 178
Configuring BS21 .............................................................. 179
Configuring OB06.............................................................. 181
Configuring Site by Template.............................................. 185
Deleting Site .................................................................... 188

Chapter 7......................................................................191
Inventory Unit and IP Configuration...........................191
Configuring IP .................................................................. 191
Configuring Inventory Unit ................................................. 194

Chapter 8......................................................................197
Cell Configuration ........................................................197
Cell Parameters Configuration and Modification................ 197
Configuring Cell ................................................................ 198
Configuring Cell GPRS Parameters ....................................... 225

Configuring Cell EDGE Parameters ....................................... 248


Configuring BCCH TRX ....................................................... 250
Configuring Non-BCCH TRX................................................. 255
Configuring Frequency Hopping ........................................... 258
Configuring Adjacent Reselection Cell ................................... 261
Configuring Adjacent Handover Cell ..................................... 264
Configuring Adjacent Handover and Reselection Cell............... 269
Configuring Adjacent Interference Cell.................................. 274
Modifying Cell Power Control Parameters .............................. 276
Modifying Cell Handover Control Parameters ......................... 282

UTRAN Cell Parameter Configuration and Modification ...... 292


Configuring UTRAN Adjacent Reselection Cell ........................ 293
Configuring UTRAN Adjacent Handover Cell ........................... 295
Configuring UTRAN Adjacent Handover and Reselection Cell .... 297
Modifying UTRAN Cell Control Parameters ............................. 299
Modifying UTRAN Cell Handover Control Parameters ............... 307

External Cell Configuration ........................................... 311


Configuring GERAN External Cell.......................................... 311
Configuring UTRAN External Cell.......................................... 313

Chapter 9......................................................................317
Alarm Parameters Configuration.................................317
Configuring CLKG Alarm Parameters .................................... 317
Configuring POWERB Alarm Parameters ................................ 320
Configuring PSN Alarm Parameters ...................................... 324
Setting Dry Contact Alarm .................................................. 327

Chapter 10....................................................................329
Data Operations ...........................................................329
Checking Global Data Validity.............................................. 329
Exporting Data.................................................................. 330
Importing Data ................................................................. 331
Searching......................................................................... 332
Synchronizing Tables ......................................................... 335
Synchronizing Modified Tables............................................. 336
Comparing MO .................................................................. 338
Comparing Sub Tree .......................................................... 339
Duplicating Sub Tree.......................................................... 340
Creating Slave Configuration Set ......................................... 342

Appendix A ...................................................................347
Abbevreviations ...........................................................347
AppendixB ....................................................................353
Figures..........................................................................353
Tables ...........................................................................365
Index ............................................................................369

This page is intentionally blank

About This Manual


Purpose
This
manual
provides
the
basic
information
NetNumenM32 configuration management operation.

about

Intended Audience
This document is intended for engineers and technicians who
perform operations on NetNumenM32 Integrated Network
Operation System. It also addresses the technical managers and
engineers.

Prerequisite Skill and Knowledge


To use this document effectively, users should have a general
understanding of wireless telecommunications technology.
Familiarity with the following is helpful:

ZXG10 NetNumen-G (V6.00) OMC software

ZXG10 BSS system and its various components

What Is in This Manual


This manual contains the following sections:
TABLE 1 M ANUAL SUMMARY

Section

Summary

Chapter 1, System
Introduction

Introduce the basic function of the


NetNumenM32 interface and creation of
nes network element.

Chapter 2, Public
Resource Configuration

Explain configuring public resources such


as BSC managed elements, BSC functions
etc.

Chapter 3, BSC Rack

Explain configuring BSC standard rack,

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

xi

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Section

Summary

Configuration

shelves, board.

Chapter 4, A Interface
Configuration

Explain configuring A interface related


parameters and their configuration
procedures.

Chapter 5, Gb Interface
Configuration

Explain configuring Gb interface and


related parameters.

Chapter 6, Site
Configuration

Explain configuring different types of sites.

Chapter 7, Inventory
Unit and IP
Configuration

Explain configuring inventory unit and


configuring IP.

Chapter 8, Cell
Configuration

Explain configuring and modifying cell and


its related parameters.

Chapter 9, Alarm
Parameters
Configuration

Explain configuring alarm parameters for


different board in iBSC.

Chapter 10, Data


Operations

Explains various data related operations


performed in configuration management

Appendix A,
Abbreviations

Lists all the abbreviations used in this


manual.

Appendix B, Figures
and Tables

Lists all the figures and tables used in this


manual.

Index

Index of terms and definitions appeared in


this manual.

Related Documentation
The following documents are related to this manual:

xii

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) Integrated


System Documentation Guide

Network

Operation

NetNumenM32 (V1.00)
System Technical Manual

Integrated

Network

Operation

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) Integrated


System Software Installation Manual

Network

Operation

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) Integrated Network


System Operation Manual (Fault Management)

Operation

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) Integrated Network Operation


System Operation Manual (Performance Management)
NetNumenM32 (V1.00) Integrated Network Operation
System Operation Manual (Security and System Tools)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

About This Manual

Conventions
Typographical
Conventions

ZTE documents employ the following typographical conventions.


TABLE 2 TYPOGRAPHICAL CONVENTIONS

Typeface

Meaning

Italics

References to other Manuals and documents.

Quotes

Links on screens.

Bold

Menus, menu options, function names, input


fields, radio button names, check boxes, dropdown lists, dialog box names, window names.

CAPS

Keys on the keyboard and buttons on screens


and company name.

Constant width

Typed text, program code and, file, directory and


function names.

[]

Optional parameters.

{}

Mandatory parameters.

Select one of the parameters that are delimited


by it.
Note: Provides additional information about a
certain topic.
Checkpoint: Indicates that a particular step needs
to be checked before proceeding further.
Tip: Indicates a suggestion or hint to make things
easier or more productive for the reader.

Mouse
Operation
Conventions

TABLE 3 MOUSE OPERATION CONVENTIONS

Typeface

Meaning

Click

Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually


the left mouse button) once.

Double-click

Refer to quickly clicking the primary mouse button


(usually the left mouse button) twice.

Right-click

Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button


(usually the right mouse button) once.

Drag

Refer to pressing and holding a mouse button and


moving the mouse.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

xiii

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

How to Get in Touch


The following sections provide information on how to obtain
support for the documentation and the software.
Customer
Support

Documentation
Support

xiv

If you have problems, questions, comments, or suggestions


regarding
your
product,
contact
us
by
e-mail
at
support@zte.com.cn. You can also call our customer support
center at (86) 755 26771900 and (86) 800-9830-9830.
ZTE welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality
and usefulness of this document. For further questions,
comments, or suggestions on the documentation, you can
contact us by e-mail at doc@zte.com.cn; or you can fax your
comments and suggestions to (86) 755 26772236. You can also
browse our website at http://support.zte.com.cn, which contains
various interesting subjects like documentation, knowledge base,
and forum and service request.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter

System Introduction
System Features
NetNumenM32 (V1.00) Integrated Network Operation System
is an integrated network operating system, which provides the
combine interface for GSM, WCDMA and TDSCDMA OMCR.
Through this operating system, a user can do operation on all of
OMCRs from single client at the same time.
Users are required to add the desired OMCR server by creating a
Network
Element
Agent
to
operate
it
through
the
NetNumenM32 (V1.00) Integrated Network Operation system.
NetNumenM32 (V1.00) Integrated Network Operation System
provides all the functions of OMCR Configuration Management. It
provide the functions of resource configuration, BSC rack
configuration, A & Gb interface configuration, site configuration,
IP
configuration,
cell
configuration,
alarm
parameters
configuration and data operations.

System Interface
User login
Purpose

To login to NetNumenM32 client, for performing intended


operations

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that client is installed


successfully.

Steps

To login to NetNumenM32 (V1.00) client, perform the following


steps:
1. Double-click the shortcut icon on the desktop or run the file
at D:\UMS client bin run.bat (client installed in D
drive is considered as example here).

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

2. Input the User Name, Password and Server Address in


the Login dialog box, as shown in Figure 1. User can select
the required Server Address from drop-down list or input IP
address in Server Address field, and click OK.
FIGURE 1 NETNUMENM32 CLIENT LOGIN DIALOG BOX

3. Upon successful login, NetNumenM32 main interface


appears, as shown in Figure 2. Else login failure interface
appears as shown in Figure 3.
FIGURE 2 NETNUMENM32 M AIN INTERFACE

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 1 - System Introduction

FIGURE 3 LOGIN FAILURE MESSAGE

END OF STEPS
Result

Login to NetNumenM32 client is successfully done.

Creating an NE Agent
Purpose

To create a Network element agent for accessing the required


OMC server

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that client is running


normally and topology management interface is accessible.

Steps

To create an NE agent, perform the following steps:


1. In the Topology Management interface, right-click on
NetNumen and select Create NE Agent as shown in Figure
4.
FIGURE 4 START CREATING NE AGENT

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

2. A Create NE Agent interface window appears as in Figure 5.


It contains the Basic attributes and Extended attributes.
Figure 6 shows the Extended attributes interface.
FIGURE 5 CREATE NE AGENT (BASIC ATTRIBUTES)

FI G U R E 6 CR E AT E N E AG E N T (E X T E N DED AT T R I B U T E S )

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 1 - System Introduction

Description of the parameters used in Create NE Agent


interface is given in Table 4.
TABLE 4 DESCRIPTION OF CREATE NE AGENT P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Basic attributes
Name

Character sting

Unique user
label given to
every NE
Agent

Vendor

Character string

Name of
vendor

IpAddress(*)

Integer type

IP address of
the OMC
server

AdministrativeState(*)

Activated

Deactivated

Selection from
dropdown list

Default: Disabled
Version

Integer type

According to
the version of
the OMC
software

Location

Character string

Place name

LinkChackPeriod(S)(*)

Integer type

Its time period


in seconds
during one
hour

Default: 3600

Memo

Character string

For the user to


add a hint

Extended attribute
Port

Integer type

PortType(*)

JMS or socket
Default: socket

FTP Port

Integer type

Address of the
port
Select from
dropdown list
Address of the
FTP port

3. Press OK to complete the process of creating NE agent.


Figure 7 shows the crated NE agent.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 7 CREATED NE AGENT

END OF STEPS
Result

NE agent is successfully created.

Accessing Configuration
Management
Purpose
Perquisites
Steps

To access the
NetNumenM32

configuration

management

interface

in

Prior to performing this task, make sure that client is running


normally and NE agent is created.
Perform the following
management interface:

steps

to

access

the

configuration

1. In the physical view of the Topology management, Rightclick on the desired NE agent and select the Start NE in the
NE Management option as shown in Figure 8.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 1 - System Introduction

FIGURE 8 STARTING NETWORK ELEMENT

It takes few seconds to start NE. If system is unable to start


the NE, then a message box appears, as shown in Figure 9.
FIGURE 9 NE STARTING FAILURE MESSAGE BOX

2. Right-click on started NE agent and then, select


Configuration Management in NE Management option as
shown in Figure 10.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 10 ACCESSING CONFIGURATION M ANAGEMENT

The configuration management pane containing the IP


address of the NE agent server appears, as in Figure 11.
FIGURE 11 CONFIGURATION M AN AGEMENT P ANE

END OF STEPS
Result
8

Configuration Management interface is successfully accessed.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 1 - System Introduction

Screen Locking
Purpose
Perquisites
Procedure

To lock the screen during the operation in Configuration


Management
NetNumenM32 client works
Management is assessable.

normally

and

Configuration

icon on the menu bar or click System and then Lock


Click
Screen, as shown in Figure 12.
FIGURE 12 LOCKING SCREEN

A confirmation message box appears as shown in Figure 13;


click OK to complete the process.
FIGURE 13 CONFIRM ATION MESSAGE FOR LOCKING SCREEN

END OF STEPS
Result

Configuration Management screen is successfully locked.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Showing System Time


Purpose
Perquisites
Steps

To show the system time during the operation in Configuration


Management
NetNumenM32 client works
Management is assessable.

normally

and

Configuration

Perform the following steps to show the system time during


working in Configuration Management:
1. On the menu bar, click System and select Show System
Time, as shown in Figure 14.
FIGURE 14 ENABLING SYSTEM TIME DESPLAY

2. Show System Time window appears, as shown in Figure 15.


Click OK to complete the process.
FIGURE 15 SHOW SYSTEM TIME WINDOW

10

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 1 - System Introduction

END OF STEPS
Result

System time is successfully shown.

Showing/Hiding Toolbar
Purpose
Perquisites
Steps

To show or hide the toolbar during the operation in Configuration


Management
NetNumenM32 client works
Management is assessable.

normally

and

Configuration

Perform the following steps to display or hide the toolbar during


working in Configuration Management:
1. On the menu bar, click System and then check or uncheck
Tool Bar, as shown in Figure 16.
FIGURE 16 SHOWING/HIDING TOOLBAR

By un-checking the Toolbar, the toolbar disappears.


END OF STEPS
Result

Toolbar is successfully displayed or hidden.

Viewing System Information


Purpose

To view the system information

Perquisites

NetNumenM32 client work


Management is assessable.

normally

and

Configuration

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

11

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Steps

Perform the following steps to view the system information:


1. On the menu bar click Help and then About as shown in
Figure 17.
FIGURE 17 VIEWING SYSTEM INFORM ATION ( ABOUT)

2.

Click Information to view the name


information of system as given in Figure 18.

and

FIGURE 18 VIEWING SYSTEM INFORM ATION (INFORM ATION)

12

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

version

Chapter 1 - System Introduction

3. Click License Info for viewing the license information of the


system.
END OF STEPS
Result

System information is successfully viewed.

Showing/Hiding Status Bar


Purpose
Perquisites
Procedure

To show or hide the status bar during the operation in


Configuration Management
NetNumenM32 client works
Management is assessable.

normally

and

Configuration

On the menu bar, click System and then check or uncheck


Status Bar, as shown in Figure 19.
FIGURE 19 SHOWING/HIDING STATUS BAR

By un-checking the Status Bar, the status bar disappears and


user cannot see the current user name and sever IP address in
the bottom of the configuration management window.
END OF STEPS
Result

Status bar is displayed or hidden successfully.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

13

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Showing/Hiding Message Area


Purpose
Perquisites
Procedure

To show or hide the message area during the operation in


Configuration Management
NetNumenM32 client works
Management is assessable.

normally

and

Configuration

On the menu bar, click System and then check or uncheck


Message Area, as shown in Figure 20.
FIGURE 20 SHOWING/HIDING MESSAGE ARE A

By un-checking the Message Area, the Error Message and


Hint Message panes disappear.
END OF STEPS
Result

Message area is displayed or hidden successfully.

User Logout
Purpose
Perquisites
Steps

To logout from the NetNumenM32


NetNumenM32 client works
Management is assessable.

normally

and

Configuration

Perform the following steps to logout from the NetNumenM32:


icon or click System and then
1. On the menu bar click
click Logout, as shown in Figure 21.

14

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 1 - System Introduction

FIGURE 21 LOGGING OUT FROM NETNUMENM32

2.

A confirmation message box appears, as shown in Figure 22.


Click OK to complete the process.
FIGURE 22 CONFIRM ATION MESSAGE TO LOGOUT FROM
NETNUMENM32

END OF STEPS
Result

User is logged out successfully.

System Exit
Purpose
Perquisites
Steps

To exit from the NetNumenM32


NetNumenM32 client works
Management is assessable.

normally

and

Configuration

Perform the following steps to exit from the NetNumenM32:


1. On the menu bar click System and then click Exit, as shown
in Figure 23.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

15

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 23 EXIT FROM NETNUMENM32

2.

A confirmation message box appears, as shown in Figure 22.


Click OK to complete the process.
FIGURE 24 CONFIRM ATION MESSAGE BOX TO EXIT NETNUMENM32

END OF STEPS
Result

User exit the NetNumenM32 Interface successfully.

Note: The difference between logout and exit is that, in


exit user exits from all interface of NetNumenM32 and it needs
to run the client for logging in again. However, in logout, user
gets the main login interface and does not need to run the client
again.

16

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 1 - System Introduction

Option Settings
Purpose
Perquisites
Steps

To configure the option settings for different users


NetNumenM32 client works
Management is assessable.

normally

and

Configuration

Perform the following steps to configure the option settings:


1. On the menu bar click System and then click Option
Settings, as shown in Figure 25.
FIGURE 25 ENTERING THE OPTION SETTING FOR STYLE SETUP

2. Option Settings dialog box appears as shown in Figure 26.


Option settings dialog box has two tabs, i.e Style and Login
User.
3. In Style dialog box, move the elements from Embedded
Client Views to the Separate Client Views according to
the requirements of user by

icon as shown in Figure 26.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

17

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 26 OPTION SETTINGS (SELECTING THE STYLE FOR DIFFERENT


USERS)

4. For the applicability of style setting, it is necessary to logout


of the ckient and then login again.
5. Click Login User tab and a dialog box as shown in Figure 27
appears.
FIGURE 27 OPTION SETTINGS (LOGIN USER)

18

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 1 - System Introduction

6. For modifying users login information, write the user Email


Address and Phone Number in the given feilds.
7. For modifying users pasward, write the Old Password,
New Password and then Confirm Password in the given
feilds. Click OK to complete the process.
8. For enabling automatic screen lock time, click Enabled
option in the Automatic Screen Lock Time pane and write
the lockup time in minutes. The default value is 30 minutes.
Click OK to complete the process.
END OF STEPS
Result

Option settings are successfully configured.

Print Setup
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure enter the print setup


NetNumenM32 client works
Management is assessable.

normally

and

Configuration

Perform the following steps to configure the print setup:


1. On the menu bar click System and then click Print Setup as
shown in Figure 28.
FIGURE 28 ENTERING PRINT SETUP

2. Print Setup dialog box appears as shown in Figure 29.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

19

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 29 PRINT SETUP DIALOG BOX

3. Select the options according to the requirements and click


Page Setup.
4. Select the page setup options according to requirements and
click Advance for advance settings.
5. Select the advance print options according to requirements
and click OK to complete the process.
END OF STEPS
Result

Print setup options are successfully configured.

Application Window
Operations
Menu Bar Dynamic Switchover
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

20

To dynamically switchover the menu bar


NetNumenM32 client works
Management is assessable.

normally

and

Configuration

Perform the following steps to switchover the menu bar:

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 1 - System Introduction

1. On the menu bar click View and then click the required
interface, for example; Fault Management as shown in
Figure 30.
FIGURE 30 MENU BAR SWITCHOVER

2. The Fault Management pane appears as shown in Figure 31.


FIGURE 31 FAULT M AN AGEMENT P ANE AFTER DYNAM IC SWITCHOVER

User can perform operations in the Fault Management as well.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

21

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

END OF STEPS
Result

Menu bar is dynamically switchedover.

Closing Current View


Purpose
Prerequisites
Procedure

To close the current view


NetNumenM32 client works
Management is assessable.

normally

and

Configuration

On the Menu bar, click System and then Close Current View
as shown in Figure 32. This closes the current operation window.
FIGURE 32 CLOSING CURRENT VIEW

Result

Current view is closed.

Closing All Views


Purpose
Prerequisites
Procedure

22

To close all the views


NetNumenM32 client works
Management is assessable.

normally

and

Configuration

On the menu bar, click System and then Close All Views as
shown in Figure 33.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 1 - System Introduction

FIGURE 33 SELECTING CLOSE ALL VIEWS

This closes all the views as shown in Figure 34.


FIGURE 34 ALL OPERATION VIEWS CLOSED

END OF STEPS
Result

All operation views are closed.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

23

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

This page is intentionally blank

24

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter

Public Resource
Configuration
Creating GERAN Sub Network
Purpose

To create GSM EDGE Radio Access Network (GERAN) sub


network

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32


client is running normally.

Steps

To configure GERAN sub network, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click OMC and then, click
Subnetwork, as shown in Figure 35.

Create

GERAN

FIGURE 35 CREATING GER AN SUB NETWORK

2. Input the User label and Subnetwork ID in Create


GERAN subnetwork dialog box, as shown in Figure 36, by
referring to Table 5. Click OK.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

25

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 36 CREATE GERAN SUB NETWORK

TABLE 5 GER AN SUB NETWORK P AR AM ETERS

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

User label

String type: 1 ~ 40

It is a unique name
given to every sub
network.

Sub network ID

Integer
type :1~4095

Unique ID given to
GERAN Sub network

END OF STEPS

Result

The GERAN Sub network is created in the topology tree as


shown in Figure 37.
FIGURE 37 CREATED GER AN SUB NETWORK

26

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

Deleting GERAN Sub Network


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To delete GERAN Sub Network


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32
client is running normally.
To delete GERAN Sub Network, Perform the following steps:
1. Right-click created GERAN sub network for example
Shanghai and click Delete in the pop-up menu as shown in
Figure 38.
FIGURE 38 DELETING GER AN SUB NETWORK

2. Click Yes in the confirmation message to delete GERAN sub


network as shown in Figure 39 .
FIGURE 39 DELETING GER AN SUB NETWORK CONFIRM ATION
MESSAGE

END OF STEPS
Result

GERAN sub network deleted successfully.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

27

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Creating BSC Managed Elements


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To create BSC managed elements


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32
client is running normally.
To create BSC managed element, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click created GERAN sub network node and go to
Create BSC managed element in the pop-up menu, as
shown in Figure 40.
FIGURE 40 CREATING BSC M AN AGED ELEMENTS

2. Enter the parameters in the Create BSC Managed Element,


dialog box, as shown in Figure 41. Configure Create BSC
Managed Element parameters by referring to Table 6.

28

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

FIGURE 41 CREATING BSC M AN AGED ELEMENTS

TABLE 6 BSC M AN AGED ELEMENT P ARAMETERS

Parameters
User label

Managed element ID

Type and Range


Alphabets,
characters, numbers
or a combination of
all

Decryption
Unique label given
to a managed
element

Integer type, range: Unique ID given to


1 ~ 4095
each managed
element

Managed element type

User can select


from drop-down
list depending on
actual
configuration

Managed element IP
address

Integer type

IP address of
managed element

Blade server IP address

Integer type

Blade server is to
save some files
for OMP in the
system and
organize these file
according to the
requirement of
NM.

Software Version

Version information

Software
version of iBSC

Vendor Name

Alphabets

Vendor
information

Location

Alphabets

Location
information

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

29

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameters

Type and Range

Decryption

Latitude

Integer type, range:


-90 ~ +90

Latitude is
measured from
equator with
positive value
going north and
negative value
going south.
Marked Longitude
and Latitude
value gives exact
site location.

Longitude

Integer type, range:


-180 ~ +180

Measured from
prime meridian
with positive
value going east
and negative
value going west

Note: Managed element IP address and blade server IP


address cannot be the same.

3. Input the information and click OK, the corresponding


managed element is created in topology tree as shown in
Figure 42 .
FIGURE 42 CREATED MANAGED ELEMENT

Note: Master configuration set is created under


managed element by the system.
END OF STEPS
Result
30

BSC managed element is created successfully.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

Creating BSC Function


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To create BSC function


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32
client is running normally.
To create BSC function, performs the following steps:
1. Right-click the Master config set, and click Create BSC
functions in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 43.
FIGURE 43 CREATING BSC FUNCTIONS

2. Input the parameters in the Basic property dialog box, as


shown in the Figure 44. Configure Basic Properties
parameters by referring to Table 7.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

31

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 44 BASIC PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX

TABLE 7 BASIC PROPERTIES P AR AMETERS

Parameter

32

Type and Range

Description

User label

Character string:
1~40

Unique user label


given to every
function

BSC ID

Integer type: 1~255

Unique ID given to
BSC

Support MNC 3
digits

Select Yes or No
from drop-down list
depending on actual
situation.

Whether supports
MNC 3 digits

MNC

Integer type: 0~999

Mobile Network Code


(MNC) is a three-digit
code. It uniquely
identifies a specific
GSM PLMN network in
a country (decided by
the MCC).

OMP IP

Integer type

IP address of OMP
board

OMP MAC

Hexadecimal format

MAC-48 and EUI-48


addresses are usually
shown in hexadecimal
format, with each
octet separated by a
dash or colon. An
example of a MAC-48
address would be

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
"00-08-74-4C-7F-1D

OMC subnet
mask

Integer type

Subnet mask of OMC


server

OMC Gateway
(Info 5)

Integer type

OMC gateway
information

OMC server
subnet

Integer type

IP address of OMC
server

Longitude

Value range: 180 ~


+180

Measured from prime


meridian with positive
value going east and
negative value going
west

Latitude

Value range: 90 ~
+90.

Latitude is measured
from equator with
positive value going
north and negative
value going south.
Marked Longitude and
Latitude value gives
exact site location.

Global Time
Zone

Global time zone can


User can select time
zone from drop-down be selected from the
actual locations timing
list provided.
zone.

Net type

SP type

CCTN - China
telecom
network
CMCN China
mobile network
CUCN China
Unicom
network
RLTN Railway
Telecom
Network
CNC China
Netcom
NFTN Military
telecommunicat
ion network
NET7 Network
7
NET8Network

Signaling
End Point (SEP)

User can select


required option
from drop-down list
depending on
actual
configuration.

Signaling

User can select


signaling point type
from the drop-down
list.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

33

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Transfer Point
(STP)
Signaling
Transfer/End Point
(STEP)

Restart flag

Select Yes or No
from drop-down list

Bureau No

Integer type: 1~253;


default value: 1

STPT18

Integer type:
0~65535; default
value: 0

It is a restart
indicator in the No. 7
Signaling.
Bureau no. is the
same as domain no.
Signaling point restart
time as STP

SNTP SYNC Cycle

Integer type:
0~4294967295;
default value: 0

SNTP server
address

IP address of SNTP
server

SNTP server is use for


timing
synchronization of all
the servers.

Test code

Hexadecimal
characters from
1~15

Test code in
hexadecimal system.

CPU thread
tracing %

Integer type: 0~100,


default value:50

Overflow control
level

Integer type

3. Click Radio basic property tab, the interface as shown in


Figure 45 appears. Configure the corresponding parameters
in the Radio basic property interface. For radio basic
properties parameters, refer to Table 8.

34

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

FIGURE 45 RADIO BASIC PROPERTY P ARAMETERS

TABLE 8 DESCRIPTION OF RADIO BASIC PROPERTY P ARAMETERS

Parameters
Dynamic
enable

Type and Range


HR

Yes:
support
dynamic
hr
enable
No:
do
support
dynamic
enable

Threshold for TRX


switched from FR
to HR (HRths,%)

Integer
1~100,

DCS1800/PCS
1900
supported
function

Drop down list

Load
indication
allowed

DCS1800

PCS 1900

hr
type:

Drop down list

User can select Yes


or No depending on
actual situation.

not

default value: 60

Send confusion
message

Description

NO:
Not
allowed to use
load indication

User can select from


any value from 1 to
100
User can select DCS
or PCS according to
the requirements

User can select Yes


or No depending on
actual situation
Whether the Load
indication is allowed

Yes: Allowed to
use
load
indication

Drop down list

User can select Yes


or No depending on

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

35

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameters
allowed

Type and Range

Inter-cell
handover
allowed

Yes:
Allow
inter-cell
handover
No:
Do
not
allow inter-cell
handover

No:
Do
not
allow to send
the assignment
failure
message
before external
directed retry

Whether the BSC is


allowed to send the
BSSAP
Confusion
message.

User can select Yes


or No depending on
actual situation
Directed
towards 3G
allowed

retry
cell is

User can select Yes


or No depending on
actual situation
Whether
external
directed retry allows
assignment failure

Yes: Allow to
send
the
assignment
failure
message
before external
directed retry

Drop down list

actual situation

No:
Do
not
allow BSC to
send
the
BSSMAP
CONFUSION
message

Drop down list

MSC version ID

Yes: Allow BSC


to send the
BSSMAP
CONFUSION
message

Drop down list

Send
assignment
failure allowed

Description

Release98
older

or

Release99
onward

or

User can select either


Relaease99
or
onwards
or
Relaease98
or
older depending on
actual situation
MSC version ID

Load
indication Integer type: 0~255,
valid time
default value: 18

Load indication valid


time

Load
period

Load indication period

indication

Integer
0~65530,

type:

default value: 1500


Automatic
resource
36

Drop down list

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This
defines

parameter
that
BSC

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

indication
threshold

Range: 0~100,

automatically
indicates
to
MSC
about the ratio of
presently
available
channels to the total
channels.
The
parameter works for
automatic indication
mode. It assists BSC
to notify MSC about
cell
resources
availability when it
reaches below the
defined threshold.

Resource
threshold

default value: 30

adjust

Drop down list


Range: 200 ~ 5000
Default value: 200

BSC
no.

MAX

reset

Drop down list

The
maximum
allowable resets to
BSC. After BSC sends
the
BSSAP
RESET
message to MSC, if
BSSAP
RESET
ACKNOWLEDGE
message
fails
to
reach BSC from MSC
within GSM-specified
T4 time interval, the
resetting
will
be
repeated

Range: 1~255,
default value: 3

Range
BARANGE

of

Integer
0~1023

Current
available
channel threshold is
the threshold that
BSC
perform
automatic
resource
indication to MSC

type:

User can select higher


and lower limits in
spin
boa
and
depending on actual
configuration
and
frequency band used
and click Add to
locate it to range of
BARANGE in the form
3&&5 as shown in
Figure 45

4. Click Others tab, the interface as shown in Figure 46


appears. Configure the corresponding parameters in the
Others interface. For radio basic properties parameters,
refer to Table 9.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

37

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 46 OTHERS P AR AMETERS

TABLE 9 DESCRIPTION OF OTHERS P AR AMETERS

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

User Priority for


EMLPP

Drop down list

This parameter use


the
service
of
preferred access for
high-priority
subscriber, that is
eMLPP service, the
system may set some
reserved
channels
(currently, only full
rate TCH channels are
supported to be the
reserved channels).

Range: 1 ~ 15
Default: 2

EMLPP
channel
reserved time

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 100
Default: 0

Low priority level

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 15

Default: 1

38

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

When the subscriber's


PriorityLevel is bigger
than or equal to this
parameter
(LowPrioLevel),
system uses the low
priority
subscriber
channel
selection
mode set by 4-1bit of
ChanSelectPrio in BTS
table.
When
PriorityLevel is less

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

Parameters

Type and Range

Description
than this parameter
(LowPrioLevel),
system uses the high
priority
subscriber
channel
selection
mode set by 8-5 bit of
ChanSelectPrio in BTS
table.

Preferred speech
version (half)

Drop down list

Preferred
speech version
(full)

rate

Half
version 3

rate

No
preferred
version
Full
version 1

rate

Full
version 2

rate

Full
version 3

rate

Drop down list

Length of super
vision

Half
version 1

Drop down list

Reserved
channel first

No
preferred
version

Yes:
Select
reserved
channels first

When
implementing
the
CS
channel
allocation policy, it
describes
the
preferred
half-rate
speech version.

When
implementing
the
CS
channel
allocation policy, it
describes
the
preferred
full-rate
speech version.

The selection order of


reserved channel and
non-reserved channel

No:
Do
not
select reserved
channels

Drop down list

Range:
1000

100

Default: 250
Length of radio

Drop down list


Range: 10 ~ 100
Default: 50

Length of timer
waiting intra BSS
handover

Drop down list


Range: 10 ~ 100
Default: 60

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

39

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameters

Type and Range

Starting time for


oriented retry

Drop down list

Description

Range: 50 ~ 200
Default: 130

Monitor physical
context request

Fixed Integer type

Timer for
waiting

Drop down list

MSG

default value: 20
Range: 5 ~ 20
Default value: 20

Timer
RANCSEST
waiting

for

Drop down list


Range: 10~100
default value: 100

Timer
for
RANCSCLECOM
waiting

Drop down list

Timer for
waiting

Drop down list

CCM

Range: 10~30
default value: 30
Range: 45~55
default value: 45

Get static param


timer

Drop down list


Range: 60~600
default value: 120

5. Click
icon to enter the other tabs in Create BSC
function as shown in Figure 47. Configure GPRS property1
parameters by referring to Table 10.

40

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

FIGURE 47 GPRS PROPERTY 1 PAR AM ETERS

TABLE 10 GPRS PROPERTIES 1 P AR AM ETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

BssGp Flow Control


BVC Flow control
period (10ms)

Drop down list

MS flow control
period(10ms)

Drop down list

NSVC
peer
to
peer delay (ms)

Drop down list

Range: 0 ~ 65535
Default : 3000

Range: 0 ~ 65535
Default : 3000

Range:
1
Default : 10

20

This parameter is
the BVC leakageratio measurement
period in the BVC
Flow
Control
process, that is,
BVC
long
measurement
period.
This parameter is
the
MS
leakageratio measurement
period in the MS
Flow
Control
process, that is, MS
long
measurement
period.

This is an NS link
layer
parameter.
The NSVC delay is
a basis for flow
control in frame

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

41

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

relay. Background
system configures
the NSVC delay
subject
to
the
actual
circumstances.
Coding Schedule Mode
Cn

Drop down list


Range: 0
Default : 85

255

This parameter is
used to determine
the
increase
of
coding mode level.
The coding mode for
TBF
(uplink
and
downlink)
in
the
channel coding mode
CSn
(1n3)
increases
to
one
level
up, if
the
number
of
data
blocks
transmitted
consecutively
and
correctly exceed the
predefined
parameter Cn[n-1].

Nn

Drop down list


Range: 0
Default : 20

Xn

255

Drop down list


Range: 0
Default : 25

42

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

100

This parameter is
used to determine
the
decrease
of
coding mode level. It
is
used
at
the
RLC/MAC layer of
BRP.
The
coding
level decreases to
one level if Xn n2 data blocks are
transmitted,
the
number
of
consecutive
data
blocks losses in the
coding mode CSn
(2n4) for the TBF
(downlink
and
uplink) is Xn[n-2]%.
This parameter is
the threshold for
determining
the
decrease in the level
of the coding mode.
It is used at the
RLC/MAC layer of
BRP.
The
coding
level
will
be
decreased by one if
Nn[n-2] data blocks
are transmitted, the
number
of

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
consecutive losses of
the data blocks in
the coding mode are
CSn (2n4) for the
TBF (downlink and
uplink) is Xn[n-2]%.

MAX
allowed
number
of
consecutive losses
of
uplink
data
block

Drop down list

Time of packet
uplink ACK/NACK
retrys

Drop down list

MAX
allowed
number
of
consecutive losses
of uplink RLC/MAC
control message

Drop down list

Range: 9
Default : 10

Range: 9
Default : 10

Range: 9
Default : 10

255

255

255

This parameter is
counter
N3101,
which is used at
RLC/MAC layer of
BRP. During packet
uplink transmission,
BSS specifies USF
(corresponding
to
one uplink TBF) for
each uplink block.
For
the USF,
if
subsequent
N3101
modules
do
not
receive
effective
data,
the
net
assumes this as a
poor quality TBF and
releases it.
This parameter is
counter
N3103,
which is used at
RLC/MAC layer of
BRP. If the network
does
not
receive
Packet Control Ack
for
consecutive
N3103 times, the net
assumes this as a
poor quality TBF and
releases it.
This parameter is
counter
N3105,
which is used the
RLC/MAC layer of
BRP. BSS sets the
RRBP domain in DL
RLC data module, if
it does not receive
effective
RLC/MAC
control
messages
from MS for about
N3105 times, the net
releases
DL
TBF
internally
and
enables T3195.

6. Click on the GPRS Property2 and an interface as shown in


Figure 48 appears. Configure the parameters according to
Table 11.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

43

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 48 GPRS PROPERTY 2 PAR AM ETERS

TABLE 11 GPRS PROPERTY 2 P ARAMETERS

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

NACC supported

Drop down list

User can select any


from depending on
actual situation.

BSCs
net
operation mode

Not
NACC

support

Support NACC,
not LLC frame
transfer
Support NACC
and LLC frame
transfer.

Drop down list

Net operation
mode 1
Net operation
mode 2

User can select


any
from
depending
on
actual situation.

Net operation
mode 3

Satellite Transmission Support


Satellite
transmission at Gb
Interface

44

Drop down list

yes

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

User can select any


from depending on
actual situation.

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

Parameters

Type and Range

indication

Extended
send
allowed

RLC
window

Description

No

Drop down list

yes

No

User can select any


from depending on
actual situation.

Uplink TBF
Support
establish

Support
extended
TBF

TBF

signal
uplink

Resource pool for


PS rate (%)

Drop down list

yes

No

Drop down list

yes

No

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 100
Default: 80

Downlink
retry

TBF

Maximum
PS
uplink user per ts

Drop down list

No retry

One time

Two time

User can select any


from depending on
actual situation.

User can select any


from depending on
actual situation.

Full dynamic Abis


resource
pool
provides the using
rate of PS channel.
The system will not
allocate
Abis
resource
to
PS
service if the using
rate exceeds this
threshold.
Times
of
reassignment
after
the
downlink
poll
overflows.

Drop down list


Range: 2 ~ 8
Default: 4

Maximum
PS
downlink user per
ts

Drop down list


Range: 2 ~ 16
Default: 6

PS
capability
threshold 0

Drop down list

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

45

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

Range: 1 ~ 32
Default: 1
PS
capability
threshold 1

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 16
Default: 8

7. Click on GPRS timer an interface as shown in Figure 49


appears. Configure the GPRS timer parameter according to
Table 12.
FIGURE 49 GPRS TIMER P AR AMETER INTERFACE

TABLE 12 GPRS TIMER PARAMETERS

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

BssGp
BVC
block/unblock
retry times

Drop down list


Range: 10 ~ 300
Default: 30

46

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

It
monitors
BSSGP
blocking/unblocking
procedure.
Global
process in BSC central
module MP uses the
timer
value.
BSS
initiates
BVC
blocking/unblocking
procedure for a point-topoint BVC in case of
OAM
intervention
or

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

Parameters

Type and Range

Description
device
faults.
BSC
repeats this procedure, if
SGSN does not return
BVC
BLOCK/UNBLOCK
ACK/NACK
messages.
The interval between the
messages is the BVC
blocking/unblocking
retry time.

BVC reset retry


times

Drop down list


Range: 10 ~ 1200
Default: 30

Suspend
times

retry

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 100
Default: 30

Resume
times

retry

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 100
Default: 30

Access
capability
update
retry
time

Drop down list

PFC
creating
retry times

Drop down list

Range: 10 ~ 300
Default: 30

It monitors BSSGP reset


procedure.
Global
process in BSC central
module MP uses the
timer value. The interval
between the BSS BVC
reset message and BSC
repetition is the BVC
blocking/unblocking
retry time.
It
monitors
BSSGP
suspending
procedure.
The interval between the
BSS first and second
packet
suspension
messages when SGSN
does not return the
acknowledge message is
the blocking/unblocking
retry time.
It
monitors
BSSGP
resuming
procedure.
BSS initiates resuming
procedure
to
SGSN
when GPRS-attached MS
is not in dedicated mode
and BSS uses Notify
SGSN to resume GPRS
service
policy.
BSS
repeats the procedure if
SGSN does not return
RESUME
ACK/NACK
message. The interval
between the messages
is the resuming retry
time.
BSSGP layer parameter,
controls
the
RA_CAPABILITY_UPDATE
procedure
Creating PFC retry time

Range: 1 ~ 100
Default: 30

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

47

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

PFC modifying
retry times

Drop down list

Modifying PFC retry time

Range: 1 ~ 100
Default: 30

Others
Protection time
for change of
FUC
channel
time

Drop down list

Protection time
for T-network
connection

Drop down list

Timer for protection of


FUC
channel
type
change

Range: 2 ~ 10
Default: 10

Timer
for
network
connection protection

Range: 2 ~ 10
Default: 10

Protection time
for
LSP
movement

Timer for protection of


LSP movement

Drop down list


Range: 2 ~ 10
Default: 10

NS
Timer
that
monitors
block/ unblock
procedure
at
NS layers

Drop down list

Timer
that
monitors reset
procedure
at
NS layers

Drop down list

NS cycle of
NS-VC
test
procedure

Drop down list

Range: 1 ~ 120
Default: 10

Range: 1 ~ 120

NS link layer, controls


the
blocking/unblocking
procedure
NS link layer, controls
the reset procedure

Default: 10

NS link layer, controls


the
periodic
test
procedure of NSVC

Range: 1 ~ 60
Default: 30

that
alive
of

Fix
integer
Default: 3

type

Can not be modified

Maximum
attempt period
of test

Fix
integer
Default: 180

type

Can not be modified

Timer
monitor
process
NSVC

PSTIMER
TFI and USF
release timer

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 65535
Default: 500

48

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Value of the timer


T3169 on RLC/MAC
layer of UPB

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

TBF
timer

Drop down list

Value of the timer T3191


on RLC/MAC layer of
UPB

release

Range: 0 ~ 65535
Default: 500

TBF
release
time
when
packet
downlink
transmission

Drop down list

TBF
protect
time
when
radio
link
failure.

Drop down list

PS
channel
delay
release
timer (100 ms)

Drop down list

Range: 0 ~ 65535
Default: 51

Range: 0 ~ 65535
Default: 500

Range: 3 ~ 300
Default: 100

Condition of enabling the


timer: when the last
PACKET
DOWNLINK
ACK/NACK or PACKET
CONTROL
ACKNOWLEDGE
message is received
Provide the value of
timer-T3195
on
RLC/MAC layer of UPB.
In this parameter the
protection time of TBF
when the radio link fails
or when the cell change
leads to MS failure to
respond.
Information of releasing
this PS channel when
this
threshold
is
achieved.

8. Click on GPRS maximum retrying times, an interface as


shown in Figure 50 appears. Configure the GPRS maximum
retrying times parameters according to Table 13.
FIGURE 50 GPRS M AXIMUM RETRYING TIMES

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

49

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

TABLE 13 GPRS M AXIMUM RETRYING TIMES P AR AMETERS

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

BVC
Max time of
BVC
block
retry

Drop down list


Range: 3 ~ 10

Maximum times of BVC


Block retry, BSSGP layer
parameter

Default: 3
Max time of
BVC unblock
retry

Drop down list


Range: 3 ~ 10
Default: 100

Max time of
BVC
reset
retry

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 255
Default: 100

Maximum times of
BVC Unblock retry,
BSSGP
layer
parameter
Maximum times of
BVC
Rest
retry,
BSSGP
layer
parameter

NS
Max time of
NS
block
retry

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 10

Maximum times of NS
Block retry, NS link layer
parameter

Default: 3
Max time of
NS
unblock
retry

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 10

Maximum times of NS
Unblock retry, NS link
layer parameter

Default: 3
Max time of
NS
alive
retry

Drop down list


Range: 0~ 20

Maximum times of NS
Alive retry, NS link layer
parameter

Default: 10

Other
MAX times of
suspend
retry

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 10

Maximum
times
of
Suspend retry, BSSGP
layer parameter

Default: 3
Max time of
resume retry

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 255

Maximum
times
of
Resume retry, BSSGP
layer parameter

Default: 3

50

MAX times of
radio access
capability
retry

Drop down list

MAX times of
PFC
create
retry

Drop down list

Range: 0 ~ 255
Default: 3

Range: 0 ~ 10

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Maximum
times
of
RA_CAPABILITY_UPDATE
retry,
BSSGP
layer
parameter
Maximum retry times of
creating PFC

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

Default: 3
MAX times of
PFC
modify
retry

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 10

Maximum retry times of


modifying PFC

Default: 3

9. Click on Timer1 and an interface as shown in Figure 51


appears. Configure the Timer1 parameters according to
Table 14.
FIGURE 51 TIMER 1 PAREMETER INTERFACE

TABLE 14 TIMER 1 P ARAM ETERS DESCRIPTION

Parameters

Type
Range

and

Blocking/unblocking
period (100ms)

Drop down list


Range: 30 ~
150
Default: 80

Protection
period
for
No.7
instantaneous
disconnection

Drop down list


Range: 60 ~
150

Description

Blocking/unblocking
period, this parameter is
T1 timer. T1 timer sets
the
time
interval
between BLOCK/UNBLOCK
ACKNOWLEDGE
message
sent from MSC to BSC
and
BLOCK/UNBLOCK
message.

Protection time for


No.7
instantaneous
disconnection

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

51

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameters

Type
Range

and

(100ms)

Default: 100

Protection
period
for
handover
request (100ms)

Drop down list


Range: 100 ~
200
Default: 100

Source
BSC
handover executing
period(100ms)

Drop down list


Range:
50~700
Default: 120

Assignment
(100ms)

period

Drop down list


Range:
40~140

Description

This parameter is T7
timer, monitoring BSSAP
HANDOVER
REQUIRED
message. T7 timer is
maximum
period
between the BSC sent
BSSAP
HANDOVER
REQUIRED message and
MSC
returns
BSSAP
HANDOVER
COMMAND
message.
This parameter is T8
timer. It is the execution
period
for
external
handover
process
in
source BSC.
This parameter is T10
timer.
It
supervises
assignment process.

Default: 80
Protection
period
for global resetting
(100ms)

Drop down list


Range: 30 ~
60
Default: 40

Circuit
resetting
period on BSS side
(100ms)

Drop down list


Range: 30 ~
150
Default: 80

Circuit
group
blocking/unblocking
period (100ms)

Drop down list


Range:
30~150
Default: 80

RLSD
receive
timer

message
protection

Drop down list


Range: 20 ~
50

This parameter is T13


timer,
which
is
a
protection time for a
local
call
clearing
process.
This
is
T19
timer
parameter
and
determines
terrestrial
circuit reset to idle state
with exception of BSCMSC SCCP connection.
This
is
T20
timer
parameter. BSS blocks
the terrestrial circuits
group
for
various
reasons such as O&M
intervention, equipment
fault/recovery, and radio
resources
unavailability/availability.
This parameter is timer
T9101, supervising the
reception of RLSD.

Default: 20
Channel activation

52

Integer

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

type

This parameter is timer


T9103,
monitoring

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

Type
Range

Parameters

MSC
clear
command
protection timer

and

Description

Default: 20

channel-activation
process.

Drop down list

This parameter is T9104


timer.
It
supervises
CLEAR
COMMAND
from
MSC.

Range: 20 ~
50
Default: 30

SCCP
connection
protection timer

Drop down list


Range: 20 ~
60

This parameter is T9105


timer, monitoring SCCP
connection process.

Default: 30
External handover
protection time in
targeted
cell
(100ms)

Drop down list


Range:
50~180

This parameter is T9113


timer,
monitoring
external handover in the
target cell.

Default: 110
Protective
time
waiting for access
(100ms)

Drop down list


Range:
50~120
Default: 70

Protective time for


applying to channel
(100ms)

Drop down list


Range: 20 ~
50
Default: 40

Protective time for


link establishment
response (100ms)

Drop down list


Range:
30~100
Default: 60

Protective time that


P0 confirms the
message
HO/ASS
COM (100ms)

Drop down list


Range: 10 ~
80
Default: 30

Encryptions
modification
(100ms)

mode
time

Drop down list


Range:
30~120

This parameter is T1
timer.
It
indicates
protection-waiting time
for MS access during
assignment or handover,
after channel activation
process.
This parameter is T2
timer.
It
indicates
protection time for MS
when applying for a
radio frequency channel.
This parameter is T3
timer.
It
indicates
protection-waiting time
for central module linkestablishment response
during
immediate
assignment.
This parameter is T4
timer.
It
indicates
protection-waiting time
for confirmation from P0
instance to HO COM or
ASS COM message.
This parameter is T5
timer.
It
supervises
modification process of
encryption mode.

Default: 100

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

53

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameters
SAP13
link
establishment time
(100ms)

Type
Range

and

Drop down list


Range:
10~300

Description
It is T6 timer parameter
and supervises SAPI3
link establishment.

Default: 100
External handover
protective time

Drop down list


Range:
50~650
Default: 100

Protective time for


N0.7
signal
instantaneous
disconnection

Protection
time
for
waiting
for
the
assignment
response
message or handover
completion message

Drop down list


Range:
100~200
Default: 100

Protective time that


PO
responses
external handover
completion
message

Drop down list


Range:
50~200
Default: 150

10. Click on Timer2 and an interface as shown in Figure 52


appears. Configure the Timer1 parameters according to
Table 15.
FIGURE 52 INTERFACE FOR TIMER 2 P ARAMETERS

54

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

TABLE 15 TIMER 2 P ARAM ETERS DESCRIPTION

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

Protective time for


RF channel release
(100ms)

Drop down list

This
is
T9
timer
parameter. T9 timer
starts when Pn instance
sends RF
CHL
REL
message to BTS on RF
channel
release.
T9
timer stops when Pn
instance
receives
a
response from BTS.

Range: 10~50
Default: 20

Queue
period
of
assignment (100ms)

Drop down list


Range: 10~150
Default: 60

Acknowledgement
period for periodic
status (100ms)

Drop down list


Range:
100~18000
Default: 3000

Mode
modification
process
time
(100ms)

Drop down list


Range: 35~100
Default: 60

Protective time for


UM
assignment
completion (100ms)

Drop down list


Range: 10~50
Default: 20

Waiting
oriented
(100ms)

time

for
retry

Drop down list


Range: 20~60

This parameter is T11


timer. It determines
the maximum allowable
queue time that starts
from the assignment
request.
This
is
T12
timer
parameter. T12 timer
starts periodically when
Pn instance receives
CONNECT CONF message
from P0 instance. Timer
decides
to
perform
activity check at peer
end. T12 timer stops
when
Pn
instance
receives RELEASE TYPE
message
This parameter is T13
timer.
It
supervises
BTS and MS modes
modification process.
It is the period between
sending of ASS/HO COM
and receiving of ASS/HO
COM ACK messages at
destination instance.
Interval
between
directed retries

Default: 20
Queue period for
handover (100ms)

Drop down list


Range: 10~150
Default: 50

First overload period


of flow traffic control

Drop down list


Range: 30~150
Default: 80

It is the maximum
allowable queue time
for handover attempt,
calculated
from
handover request.
This mT11 timer in
combination with mT12
timer modifies ACCESS
CONTROL
parameter
configuration
in
the
cell. BSC notifies the

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

55

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameters

Type and Range

Description
MS to achieve flow
control through system
information. The value
of timer must be less
than that of mT12
timer.

Second
overload
period of flow traffic
control(100ms)

Drop down list


Range: 50~200
Default: 150

The mT12 timer in


combination with mT11
timer modifies ACCESS
CONTROL parameter in
the cell. BSC notifies
the MS to achieve flow
control through system
information.
The two timers control
the cell traffic flow.

T-AMR-RTD (100ms)

Integer type

When using AMR, wait


for TAmrRtd to expire
and then issue the
assignment/handover
command

Time of micro-micro
handover
delay
(100ms)

Drop down list

A delay time length


value is necessary
(timer value) in the
micro-micro
handover control. In
this way, it could
prevent fast moving
mobiles staying in
the micro cell layer.

Range: 50~200
Default: 80

Protective time for


recourses
on
external
inHandover

Drop down list

Service
status
protection timer

Drop down list

Range: 30~150
Default: 40

Range:
100~18000
Default: 3000

Regular
timer for
system
message
broadcast

Drop down list


Range:
6000~864000
Default: 18000

56

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

AppRadioAppAppRadioAvail (external
hand in), RadioApplying
status protection timer,
the timer is
in
RadioApplying
status
after
receiving
the
A_Ho_Req message and
before
receiving
APP_RADIO_AVAIL
message.

Timer for Serving


state protection

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

Handover protection
timer
for
WCDMA/FDD

Drop down list

The protection time


after
sending
intersystem
to
UTRAN
handover
command
(UM) to UE (On Pn)

Range: 1~650
Default: 100

Handover period for


source cell

Drop down list


Range: 35~100
Default: 60

Assignment
(100ms)

period

Drop down list


Range: 35~100
Default: 60

Channel
release
period (100ms)

Drop down list


Range: 10~150
Default: 50

Channel
deactivation
(100ms)

delay

Drop down list


Range: 1~5
Default: 3

Continue
mode
(100ms)

time for
modify

Drop down list


Range: 50~70

This timer indicates the


period
for
internal
handover process of
BSC.
This timer indicates the
time for assignment
period
and
internal
handover of a cell.
This timer supervises
the
channel
release
process.
The
timer
starts when BSC sends
RIL3_RR
CHANNEL
RELEASE message to
MS. The timer stops
when
BSC
receives
RELEASE
INDICATION
message
from
BTS
(when BTS receives
DISC frame from MS).
After releasing the UM
interface
radio
link
layer, in order to make
sure the radio link is
disconnected, BSC sets
a period of protection
time rmsT3111. This
releases the wireless
channel
and
deactivates
it
after
rmsT3111 timer stops.
Connection
timer
during mode change

Default: 50
Handover Protection
Time for UTRAN

Drop down list


Range: 1~65535

The protection time for


external handover

Default: 100
Time for destination
instance waiting for
available resources
when
forced
disconnection

Drop down list


Range: 10~50
Default: 30

This
is
timer
15
parameter. T15 timer
starts
when
the
destination
instance
sends PREEMPT APPLY
message
to
the
disconnected
object.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

57

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameters

Type and Range

Description
T15 timer stops when a
destination
instance
receives the response
RESOURCE
AVAILABLE
message
for
the
disconnected
object,
indicating
resource
availability.

Protection time for


FUC response to
system
message
broadcast

Drop down list


Range: 30~100
Default: 50

The protection timer for


system
message
broadcast to wait for
FUC response.

Note: In GSM system, each BS is allocated with a local


color code called base station identity code (BSIC). If, at a
physical location, one MS receives the BCCH TRX of two cells at
the same time and their channel numbers are same, the MS
distinguishes them by the BSIC.

11. Click on BVC Flow Control and an interface as shown in


Figure 53 appears. Configure the BVC Flow Control
parameters according to Table 16.
FIGURE 53 - INTERFACE OF BVC FLOW CONTROL P ARAMETERS

58

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

TABLE 16 DESCRIPTION OF BVC FLOW CONTROL P ARAMETERS

Parameters
BVC
flow
supported

control

Type and Range

Description

Drop down list

BVC
flow
control
occurs at Gb interface
between SGSN and
BSS, and only in
downlinks.
BSS
provides
control
parameters and SGSN
executes, in order to
avoid one BVC on BSS
to abandoning some
LLC data because of
the overtime caused
by grouping channel is
too busy (too many
LLC frame caches) and
to avoid abandoning
new downlink LLC data
because of limit of
memory
resource
(overflow of LLC frame
caches).

Yes: Support
BVC
flow
control
NO: Do not
support BVC
flow control

Default: Yes

MS
flow
supported

control

Drop down list

Yes: Support
MS
flow
control

User can select either


Yes or No depending
on actual situation

NO: Do not
support
MS
flow control

Default: No
Flow control mode

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 3
Default: 1

BSC has different flow


control modes, which
report
flow
control
parameters to SGSN.

Mode 1: Report
flow
control
parameters
according
to
actual traffic on
radio
interface
counted at BSC
Mode 2: Report
flow
control
parameters
according
to
max traffic that
the
cell
can
provide
Mode3:

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

59

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

Reserved
Parameters of
control mode 1

flow

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 100
Default: 1

Parameters of
control mode 2

flow

Drop down list


Range: 10 ~ 1000
Default: 214

BVC flow control R


MIN value

Drop down list


Range: 10 ~ 300
Default: 80

MS flow control R MIN


value

Drop down list


Range: 10 ~ 300
Default: 80

BVC
flow
threshold

control

BSC
reports
flow
control
parameters
according to actual
traffic
at
radio
interface
when
adopting mode 1.
BSC
reports
flow
control
parameters
according
to
max
traffic that the cell can
provide when adopting
mode 2.
This is the minimum
value of leaking rate R
in reported BVC flow
control
parameters
under all kinds of flow
control mode.
This is the minimum
value of leaking rate R
in reported MS flow
control
parameters
under all kinds of flow
control mode.

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 100
Default: 80

MS
flow
threshold

control

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 100
Default: 80

12. Click on EDGE property and an interface as shown in Figure


54 appears. Configure the EDGE Property parameters
according to Table 17.

60

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

FIGURE 54 INTERFACE OF EDGE PROPERTY P AR AMETERS

TABLE 17 EDGE PROPERTY P AR AMETERS DESCRIPTION

Parameters

Type and Range

Support PFC

Drop down list

Description

Yes: Support PFC


NO:
Do
support PFC

not

Default: No

BSC supports page


coordination

Drop down list

Yes:
Support
page coordination
NO:
Do
not
support
page
coordination

Default: No

SGSN version ID

Drop down list

Version of R98 or

This parameter is
broadcasted
in
GPRS
CELL
OPTIONS through
SI13, PSI1, and
PSI13 messages.
For
more
information, refer
to the protocol
04.60 12.24.
This
parameter
determines
whether intra-BSC
cell supports CS
based paging. This
parameter
is
broadcasted
through
SI13,
PSI1, and PSI13
messages.
For
more information,
refer to protocol
04.60 12.24. It is
invalid when NMO
is 1.
This
parameter
determines
the
SGSN
version
number.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

61

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

its above

Version of R99:

Default: Version of R99


R99 ind

Drop down list

Version of R98 or
its above

It is broadcasted
to
MS
through
PSI1, SI13, and
PSI13.

Version of R99:

Default: Version of R99


RS

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 100
Default: 20

RR

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 100
Default: 20

RA

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 100
Default: 10

RM

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 100
Default: 25

RB

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 100
Default: 10

RG

Uplink
throughputweight value at Gb
interface,
the
dynamic
Abis
adjustment
parameter.
Downlink
throughputweight value at Gb
interface,
the
dynamic
Abis
adjustment
parameter.
Value of EGPRS
MS
accessing
request times, the
dynamic
Abis
adjustment
parameter.
Value
of
highbandwidth request
times,
the
dynamic
Abis
adjustment
parameter.
Value of largest
bandwidth
used,
dynamic
Abis
adjustment
parameter.

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 100
Default: 5

RE

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 100
Default: 10

62

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

EDGE TRX rate

Chapter 2 - Public Resource Configuration

Parameters

Type and Range

Description

Drop down list

Adjust
dynamic
resource
threshold.

Range: 0 ~ 100
Default: 5

END OF STEPS
Result

BSC Function is created successfully as shown in Figure 55.


FIGURE 55 CREATED BSC FUNCTION

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

63

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

This page is intentionally blank

64

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter

BSC Rack Configuration


This chapter explains the procedure of configuring BSC rack and
its shelves in NetNumenM32.

Creating a BSC Rack


Purpose
Prerequisites

Steps

To create a BSC rack


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and managed element, and configuration set
are successfully configured.
To configure BSC rack, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click BSC device config, and click Create BSC
rack, as shown in Figure 56.
FIGURE 56 CREATING BSC RACK

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

65

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

2. A dialog box appears as shown in Figure 57. Select the Rack


No and Rack Type and then click OK, this result in creating
a BSC rack.
FIGURE 57 SELECTING RACK NO AND TYPE

3. Double click on the BSC rack under BSC device configuration


and the output appears as shown in Figure 58.
FIGURE 58 BSC STANDARD RACK

END OF STEPS
Result

66

BSC rack is successfully created.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

Creating BSC Rack by Template


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure BSC rack by template


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32
client is running normally.
To configure BSC rack by template, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click BSC device config, and click Create Create
BSC rack by template in the pop-up menu, as shown in
Figure 59.
FIGURE 59 CREATING BSC RACK BY TEMPLATE

2. Create BSC Rack template appears as shown in Figure 60.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

67

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 60 CREATE BSC RACK BY TEMPLATE

3. Click OK to complete the process.


END OF STEPS
Result

BSC rack by template is successfully created.

Control Shelf Boards


Configuration
This section describes control shelf boards positions along with
their configuration details.

Creating Control Shelf


Purpose
Prerequisites

68

To create a control shelf


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and managed element, and configuration set
are successfully configured.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

Steps

To create control shelf, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click on Standard rack and then, click Create shelf
in the pop-up menu as shown in Figure 61.
FIGURE 61 CREATING SHELF

2. Input User label and select shelf type from Shelf type
drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in Figure 62.
FIGURE 62 CREATING CONTROL SHELF DIALOG BOX

END OF STEPS
Result

Control shelf is successfully created.


Table 18 describes control shelf and position of board in the
control shelf.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

69

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

TABLE 18 CONTROL SHELF BOARD POSITION

Logical Board Name

Slot No.

CMP

5, 6, 7, 8

OMP

11, 12

UIMC

9, 10

CLKG

13, 14

CHUB

16, 17

Configuring OMP Board


Purpose
Prerequisites

To configure OMP board


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and control shelf is created successfully.
Note: Before configuring any other board in the control shelf,
user should configure OMP board first.

Steps

To configure OMP board, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click slot no. 11-shelf no. 2 and then, click Create
board in the pop-up menu.
2. Select OMP in Board function type drop-down list, and
select 1+1 backup mode or No backup mode depending
on actual configuration as shown in Figure 63.
FIGURE 63 CONFIGURING OMP BOARD (BASIC INFORMATION)

70

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

3. Click Module configuration information, and select


Module type from the drop-down list, depending on actual
configuration. Click OK as shown in Figure 64.
FIGURE 64 CONFIGURING OMP BOARD (MODULE CONFIGURATION
INFORM ATION)

4. The OMP boards as shown in Figure 65 appear.


FIGURE 65 OMP BOARDS IN CONTROL SHELF AFTER CONFIGURATION

END OF STEPS
Result

OMP board is successfully configured.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

71

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Configuring UIMC Board (Control


Shelf
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure UIMC board


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and control shelf is created successfully.
To configure UIMC board, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on slot no. 9 in the control shelf. Click Create
board in the pop-up menu as shown in Figure 66.
FIGURE 66 CREATING UIMC BOARD

2. Select Board function type as UIMC, select 1+1 backup


mode or No backup mode depending on actual
configuration, and click OK as shown in Figure 67.

72

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

FIGURE 67 CONFIGURING UIMC BOARD (BASIC INFORM ATION)

Figure 68 shows the UIMC board after the configuration.


FIGURE 68 APPE ARANCE UIMC BOARD IN THE CONTROL SHELF

END OF STEPS
Result

UIMC board is successfully configured.

Configuring CMP Board


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure CMP board


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and control shelf is created successfully
To configure CMP board perform the following steps:

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

73

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

1. Right-click on Slot 5 in Control shelf and then, click Create


board in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 69.
FIGURE 69 CREATING CMP BOARD

2. Select Board function type as CMP, and select 1+1


backup mode or No backup mode from Backup mode
drop-down list, depending on actual configuration, as shown
in Figure 70.
FIGURE 70 CONFIGURING CMP BOARD (BASIC INFORMATION)

3. Click Module configuration information, as shown in


Figure 71. User can modify Module No information if
necessary.

74

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

FIGURE 71 CONFIGURING CMP BOARD (MODULE CONFIGURATION


INFORM ATION)

4. The configuration of CMP board is completed as shown in


Figure 72.
FIGURE 72 APPEARANCE OF CMP BOARD IN CONTROL SHELF

END OF STEPS
Result

CMP board is successfully configured.

Configuring CLKG Board


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure CLKG board


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and control shelf is created successfully
To configure CLKG board, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click slot no. 13, and click Create board in the pop-up
menu as in Figure 73.
FIGURE 73 CREATING CLKG BOARD

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

75

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

2. Select Board function type as CLKG from drop-down list


and select 1+1 backup mode or No backup mode from
Backup mode drop-down list, depending on actual
configuration and click OK as in Figure 74.
FIGURE 74 CONFIGURING CLKG BOARD (BASIC INFORM ATION)

3. Configured CLKG board appears as shown in Figure 75.


FIGURE 75 APPEARANCE OF CLKG BORAD IN CONTROL SHELF

END OF STEPS
Result

CLKG board is configured successfully.

Configuring CHUB Board


Purpose
76

To configure CHUB board

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is


working normally and control shelf is created successfully
Steps

To configure CLKG board, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click slot no. 15, and click Create board in the pop-up
menu as in Figure 76.
FIGURE 76 CREATING CHUB BOARD

2. Select Board function type as CHUB from drop-down list


and select 1+1 backup mode or No backup mode from
Backup mode drop-down list, depending on actual
configuration and click OK as in Figure 77.
FIGURE 77 CONFIGURING CHUB BOARD (BASIC INFORM ATION)

3. Configured CHUB board appears as shown in Figure 78.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

77

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 78 APPEARANCE OF CHUB BORAD IN CONTROL SHELF

END OF STEPS
Result

CHUB board is successfully configured.

Resource Shelf Boards


Configuration
This section describes resource shelf boards position along with
their configuration details.

Creating Resource Shelf


Purpose
Prerequisites

Steps

To configure a resource shelf


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and managed element, and configuration set
are successfully configured.
To configure resource shelf, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on the Standard rack and then click Create
shelf in the pop-up menu as shown in Figure 79.
FIGURE 79 CREATING SHELF

2. Input User label and select shelf type from Shelf type
drop-down list, and click OK, as shown in Figure 80.

78

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

FIGURE 80 CREATING SHELF DIALOG BOX

Note: Resource shelf can be created in shelf no 1, 3, and 4


in the BSC Standard rack
END OF STEPS
Result
Related
Information

Resource shelf is successfully created.


Table 19 describes shelf types and their functions
TABLE 19 SHELF TYPES

Shelf Type

Function

Control shelf

O&M function, Global Clock, Controlling


Management, Control Ethernet Switch etc.

Resource shelf

Accessing unit and user processing function

Switching Shelf

Packet Switch Network shelf (BPSN)


Provide Packet Switch Network

Circuit Switch Network Shelf (BCSN)


Provide Circuit Switch Network

For information on BSC boards refer to Table 20.


TABLE 20 BOARD DESCRIPTION

Logical Board
Name

Logical
Board

Physical
Board

Description

GUP

BIPB

VTCD

Abis processing board

CHUB

CHUB

CHUB

Hub for controlling

CLKG

CLKG

CLKG

Clock board

CMP

CMP

MPX86/2

Service and Call


Control board

GUP

DRTB

VTCD

Transcoder and
adaptor Board

DTB

DTB

DTB

Digital Trunk Board

SPB

GIPB

SPB

Gb interface access
board

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

79

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Logical Board
Name

Logical
Board

Physical
Board

Description

GLI

GLI

GLIQV

GE interface board

SPB

LAPD

SPB

LAPD process board

IPI

IPBA

MNIC

IP Abis interface
access board

SPB

SPB

SPB

Signaling process
board

OMP

OMP

MPX86/2

System control and


management board

PSN

PSN

PSN4V

Packet switch board

SDTB

SDTB

SDTB

Sonet digital trunk


board

UIMU/UIMT/UI
MC

UIM

UIM_2

Universal interface
board

UPPB

UPPB

VTCD

User plane
processing board

The following table describes resource shelf various functions


and position of each board in the shelf.
TABLE 21 RESOURCE SHELF BOARD POSITIONING

Logical Board
Name

Type of Shelf

Slot No.

Abis Interface (E1 Link)

DTB

Resource Shelf

1,2,3,5,11, and 17

SPB

4,5

GUP

6,7,8

UIMU

9,10 and 2nd shelf


9,10
A interface (E1 Link)

DTB

1st shelf 14, 2nd


shelf 2,4,14,15,17

SPB

2nd shelf 1,15

UIMU

Resource Shelf

9,10 and
2nd shelf 9,10

A interface (STM Link)


SDTB

80

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

1st shelf 17 and

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

Logical Board
Name

Type of Shelf

Slot No.

2nd shelf 2,16,17


SPB

Resource Shelf

2nd shelf 3,4


9,10 and

UIMU

nd

shelf 9,10

Gb interface(FE link)
BIPI

1st shelf 13

UPPB

1st shelf 12

Resource Shelf

UIMU

9,10 and 2nd shelf


9,10

Configuring UIMU Board


Purpose
Prerequisites

Steps

To configure UIMU board


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and managed element, and configuration set
are successfully configured.
To configure UIMU board, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click required slot and click Create board in the popup menu as shown in Figure 81. In the following
configuration, RCBU is considered as A interface functional
shelf.
FIGURE 81 CREATING BOARD

2. User has to create UIMU board in slot no. 9 of resource shelf.


UIMU board can be configured in 1+1 backup mode or No
backup mode depending on actual situation.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

81

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 82 CONFIGURING UIMU BOARD (BASIC INFORM ATION)

FIGURE 83 CONFIGURING UIMU BOARD (BOARD CONNECTION


INFORM ATION)

Note: For configuring UIMU board in second shelf, user need


to select connect unit as shown in Figure 83.
3. Click OK after setting all the configurations and the output
appears as shown in Figure 84.
FIGURE 84 APPEARANCE OF UIMU BOARD IN RESOURCE SHELF

END OF STEPS

82

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

Result

UIMU board is successfully configured.

Configuring SPB Board


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure SPB board


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and resource shelf is created successfully.
To configure SPB board, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click slot no. 14 in resource shelf and then, click
Create board in the pop-up menu to configure SPB as
shown in Figure 85.
FIGURE 85 CONFIGURING SPB BOARD (BASIC INFORMATION)

2. Click PCM information tab, and select row under PCM No,
click
to allocate it to Selected PCM at the right as
shown in Figure 86. User can select required Frame mode
form the drop-down list by referring to Table 22.
TABLE 22 FRAME MODE

Set Frame
Mode

Value

Description

Double Frame

If the configuration is double


frame format, then in R_BRCH
table, AR < 32

Multi Frame

If the configuration is multi


frame format, then in R_BRCH
table, AR < 32

Framed False

0xef

This mode is mainly used for


Gb interface.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

83

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Set Frame
Mode

Value

Description
If the configuration is false
framing format, then in
R_BRCH table, AR <= 32

FIGURE 86 CONFIGURING SPB BOARD (PCM INFORM ATION)

3. Click OK to configure SPB board and output appears as


shown in Figure 87.
FIGURE 87 APPEARIENCE OF SPB BOARD IN RESOURCE SHELF

END OF STEPS
Result

SPB board successfully configured.

Configuring DRTB Board


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure DRTB board


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and resource shelf is created successfully.
To configure DRTB board, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on slot no. 6 in Resource shelf and then click
Create board in the pop-up menu.

84

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

2. Select DRTB as Board function type under Basic


information and click DSP configuration information tab
as shown in Figure 88.
FIGURE 88 CONFIGURING DRTB BOARD (BASIC INFORM ATION)

3. Select type from the Trunk group drop-down list depending


on actual configuration. Select row under DSP No, and click
to allocate it to Selected DSP No, and click OK, as
shown in Figure 89.
FIGURE 89 CONFIGURING DRTB BOARD (DSP INFORMATION)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

85

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Note: DRTB board is logical name of the GUP board


Table 23 describes trunk group parameters:
TABLE 23 TRUNK GROUP INFORM ATION

Trunk Group

Description

Type

Full rate voice version 1

FR1

Half rate voice version 1

HR1

Full rate voice version 1,


Half rate voice version 1

FR1, HR1

Full rate voice version 2

FR2

Full rate voice version 1,


2

FR1, FR2

Full rate voice version 2,


Half rate voice version 1

FR2, HR1

Full rate voice version 3,


Half rate voice version 3

FR1, FR2, HR1

24

Full rate voice version 3,


Half rate voice version 3

FR3, HR3

25

Full rate voice version 1,


2, 3, Half rate voice
version 3

FR1, FR2, FR3, HR3

27

Full rate voice version 1,


2, 3, Half rate voice
version 1, 3

FR1, FR2, FR3, HR1,


HR3

4. DRTB board appears in resource shelf as shown in Figure 90.


FIGURE 90 APPEARANCE OF DRTB BOARD IN RESOURCE SHELF

END OF STEPS
Result

DRTB board is successfully configured.


Note: Refer to Table 21 for resource shelf boards position
and functioning to configure various resource shelf boards.

86

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

Configuring LAPD Board


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure LAPD board


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and resource shelf is created successfully.
To configure LAPD board, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on Slot 16 in Resource shelf and then, click
Create board in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 91.
FIGURE 91 CONFIGURING L APD BOARD

2. Select LAPD as board type in Board function type and click


PCM information tab.
FIGURE 92 CONFIGURING L APD BOARD (BASIC INFORM ATION)

to allocate it to
3. Select row under PCM No, and click
Selected PCM, user can select PCM type and frame mode
from the PCM type and Frame mode drop-down list
respectively depending on actual configuration.
4. Click OK to Configure LAPD board.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

87

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 93 CONFIGURING L APD BOARD (PCM INFORMATION)

LAPD board appears in the resource shelf as shown in Figure


94.
F I G U R E 9 4 A P P E A R A N C E O F L AP D B O A R D I N R E S O U R C E S H E L F

END OF STEPS
Result

88

LAPD board is configured successfully.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

Configuring BIPB Board


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure BIPB board


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and resource shelf is created successfully.
To configure BIPB board, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click slot no. 17 or 5~8 in Resource shelves and then,
click Create board in the pop-up menu.
FIGURE 95 CONFIGURING BIPB BOARD (BASIC INFORM ATION)

2. Click DSP configuration information tab, and select row


under DSP No. click
DSP No, as shown in Figure 96.

to allocate it to Selected

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

89

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 96 CONFIGURING BIPB BOARD (DSP INFORMATION)

3. Click OK to configure BIPB board and the board appears in


resource shelf as shown in Figure 97.
FIGURE 97 APPEARANCE OF BIPB BOARD IN RESOURCE SHELF

END OF STEPS

Result

BIPB board is successfully configured.

Configuring DTB Board


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

90

To configure DTB board


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and resource shelf is created successfully.
To configure DTB board, perform the following steps:

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

1. Right-click on the required slot in the resource shelf and then,


click Create board in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure
98.
FIGURE 98 CONFIGURING DTB BOARD

Note: Configuring DTB Board in slot no. 3 is considered as


example here for the positioning of DTB board in resource shelf
user can refer to Table 21.
2. Select Board function type as DTB in the drop-down list, as
shown in Figure 99.
FIGURE 99 CONFIGURING DTB BOARD (BASIC INFORMATION)

3. Click PCM Information tab and select PCM type and


Frame mode from the drop-down list by referring Table 24.
Select row under PCM No. and click
Selected PCM.

to allocate it to

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

91

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 100 CONFIGURING DTB BOARD (PCM INFORMATION)

TABLE 24 PCM INFORM ATION P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

PCM type

User can select A interface PCM; Abis


interface PCM from drop-down list.
User can select either of the following from the
drop-down list.

Frame mode

Double frame

Multi frame

Frame false

4. User can change the frame mode in the Selected PCM by clicking row under Frame mode and selecting required
frame mode in the drop-down list as shown in Figure 101.

92

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

FIGURE 101 CONFIGURING DTB BOARD (CHANGING FRAME MODE)

5. Click OK to end the process and DTB board appears in the


resource shelf as shown in Figure 102.
FIGURE 102 APPE ARANCE OF DTB BOARD IN RESOURCE SHELF

END OF STEPS
Result

DTB board configured successfully as shown in Figure 102.

Switching Shelf Boards


Configuration
This section describes switching shelf board position along with
their configuration details.
Note: For creating switching shelf, refer to Creating
Resource Shelf. The only difference is Shelf Type is selected as
Switch Shelf.
The following tables describe switching shelf and position of
board.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

93

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

TABLE 25 PACKET SWITCHING SHELF

Board Name

Slot No.

GLI

Slot no 1,2

PSN

Slot NO.7,8

UIMC

Slot no 15,16

For more information on the types of board and shelves, refer to ZXG10
iBSC (6.00) Base Station Controller Technical Manual.

Configuring UIMC Board


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure UIMC board


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and switching shelf is created successfully.
To Configure UIMC board, perform the following steps:
In the following example, switching shelf is considered as packet
switching shelf.
1. Right-click slot no. 15, and click Create board in the pop-up
menu as shown in Figure 103.
FIGURE 103 CREATING A UIMC BOARD

2. Select Board function type as UIMC from drop-down list


and select 1+1 backup mode or No backup mode in
Backup mode drop-down list, depending on actual
configuration and click OK as shown in Figure 104.

94

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

FIGURE 104 SELECTING THE BASIC PROPERTIES FOR UIMC BOARD

The UIMC board appears in switching shelf as shown in


Figure 105.
FIGURE 105 APPEAR ANCE OF UIMC BOARD IN SWITCHING SHELF

END OF STEPS
Result

UIMC board is configured successfully.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

95

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Configuring PSN Board


Purpose

To configure PSN board

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is


working normally and switching shelf is created successfully.

Procedure

Right-click slot no. 7, and click Create board in the pop-up


menu and Click OK as shown in Figure 106.
FIGURE 106 CONFIGURING BASIC INFORM ATION ABOUT PSN BOARD

System configures PSN boards in slot no. 7 and 8 as shown in


Figure 107.

96

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

FIGURE 107 APPEAR ANCE OF PSN BOARD IN SWITCHING SHELF

END OF STEPS
Result

PSN board is successfully configured.

Configuring GLI Board


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure GLI board


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32 is
working normally and switching shelf is created successfully.
GLIQV is the logical name of GLI board
To configure GLIQV, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click slot no. 1, and click Create board in the pop-up
menu.
to
2. Select Port No. from the spin box and click
allocate it to Selected connect unit. Select row under
Connection unit, as shown in Figure 108.
FIGURE 108 CONFIGURING GLIQV BOARD (BOARD CONNECTION
INFORM ATION)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

97

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

3. Click OK to complete the process.


Table 26 describes GLI board parameters.
TABLE 26 GLI BOARD P ARAMETERS

Module Type

Type and Range

Connect Unit

Integer type

Connect type

User can select from dropdown list depending on actual


configuration.

Port No

Integer type

END OF STEPS
Result

GLI board is successfully configured.


After configuring all shelves and boards, BSC rack is configured
successfully as shown in Figure 109. Resource shelf is
considered as A-interface functional shelf, and switching shelf is
considered as packet switching shelf in the following rack
configuration.
FIGURE 109 CONFIGURED BSC RACK

98

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

BSC Board Operations


This section consists of following topic:

Deleting/Querying Modifying BSC Boards

Deleting/Querying/Modifying BSC
Board
Purpose
Prerequisites

To delete /modify /query BSC board


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32
client is running normally.

Deleting BSC Board


Steps

To delete BSC board, Perform following step:

Right-click DTB board and click Delete board in the pop-up


menu as shown in Figure 110.
FIGURE 110 DELETING BSC BOARD

Note: Deleting DTB board in resource shelf is considered


as an example in this topic.

Related
Information

Except OMP board, UIMC board must be the last to delete in


BCTC shelf; user should delete other boards first.
Except OMP board, UIMU board must be the last to delete in
BUSN shelf; user should delete other boards first.
OMP board must be the last to delete.

END OF STEPS
Result

DTB board is deleted successfully.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

99

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Querying BSC Board Properties


Steps

Perform the following steps to query the properties of BSC board:


1. Right-click DTB board and click Board property as shown in
Figure 110.
2. Board basic property, CPU information and PCM information
about the selected board appears as shown in Figure 111.
FIGURE 111 BOARD PROPERTY VIEW

Note: Querying DTB board properties in resource shelf is


considered as an example in this topic.
END OF STEPS
Result

Board properties queried successfully.

Modifying BSC Board CPU Information


Steps

To modify board CPU information, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click DTB board and click Board property as shown in
Figure 110.
Note: Modifying DTB board CPU information is considered
as an example in this topic.
2. Click CPU information tab, and modify the required
parameters in the spin box by referring Table 27. Click
Modify to allocate it to CPU information. Click OK, as
shown in Figure 112.

100

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 3 - BSC Rack Configuration

FIGURE 112 MODIFYING BOARD CPU INFORMATION

TABLE 27 CPU INFORMATION P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

CPU NO

Integer type

CPU Number of board

Low threshold of
over loading
(C)

Integer type:
1~100,

Parameter describes
the low threshold of
CPU overloading

High threshold
of overloading
(C)

Integer type:
1~100,

High threshold
of alarm
temperature(C
)

Integer type:
80~95,

Reset
temperature
(C)

Integer type:
85~100,

default value: 80

default value: 90

default value: 90

default value: 95

Parameter describes
the high threshold of
CPU overloading
Parameter describes
the high threshold of
CPU alarm temperature
Parameter
describes
the threshold of CPU
reset temperature

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

101

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Stream control
value

Type and Range

Integer type:
0~65535,
default: 0

Description

Flow
control
threshold, the unit is
KB. It is used for the
system log to control
the traffic, to avoid
the
message
congestion

END OF STEPS
Result

102

Deleting modifying querying BSC board performed successfully.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter

A Interface Configuration
This chapter explains the A interface configuration procedure
and its related information.

Configuring Local Office


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure local office operation point


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure local office, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on A Interface related config, and click Create
Local office in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 113.
FIGURE 113 CONFIGURING LOCAL OFFICE

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

103

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

2. Input User label and configure all parameters in Create


Local Office dialog box, as shown in Figure 114, by referring
to Table 28.
FIGURE 114 CREATE LOCAL OFFICE DIALOG BOX

TABLE 28 LOCAL OFFICE P AR AMETERS

Parameter
User label

Type and Range


Characters, numbers or
combination of both: 1~40

Net type

104

Description

CCTN-China
network
CMCN China
network

telecom
mobile

CUCN China Unicom


network
RLTN
Railway
Telecom Network
CNC China Netcom
NFTN
Military
telecommunication
network

NET7 Network 7

NET8 Network 8

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

unique name
given to the office

User can select


from drop down
list depending on
actual
configuration.

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Net
Application
information

User can select Netapp


enable, Netapp disable,
from drop-down list
depending on actual
configuration.

Net
appearance

Integer type: 0~8, default: 0

OPC (14
bits )

Integer type: 0~7, 0~255,


0~7

14-digit signaling
point code is used
between MSC and
BSC

OPC (24
bits)

Integer type: 0~7, 0~255,


0~7

24-digit signaling
point code is used
between MSC and
other entity

TUP user
Support

User can select Yes or No


depending on actual
configuration

Whether system
support TUP user

ISUP user
support

User can select Yes or No


depending on actual
configuration

Whether system
support ISUP user

SCCP user
support

User can select Yes or No


depending on actual
configuration

Whether system
support SCCP
USER

3. Click OK, as shown in Figure 114.


END OF STEPS
Result

Local office is successfully configured.

Configuring Local No.7 SSN


Steps

To configure local N7 SSN, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click Local NO7 SSN config, and click Create
Local NO7 SSN in the pop-up menu.
2. Input User label, and configure parameters in Create Local
NO.7 SSN dialog box, as shown in Figure 115, by referring
to Table 29.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

105

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 115 CREATE LOCAL NO.7 SSN DIALOG BOX

TABLE 29 LOCAL NO.7 SSN P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and range

User label

Characters, numbers or combination of


both: 1~40

Subsystem NO

Integer type: 0~255, default value: 0

System tag

User can select from Only one


subsystem and Backup subsystem from
drop-down list depending on actual
configuration.

Backup system
office ID

Integer type: 0~256, default value: 0

Backup subsystem
No

Integer type: 0~255, default value: 0

END OF STEPS
Result

Local No. 7 SSN is successfully configured.

Configuring Adjacent Office


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure adjacent office and its related elements


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure adjacent office, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click Local office and click Create Adjacent office
as shown in Figure 116

106

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

FIGURE 116 CONFIGURING ADJACENT OFFICE

Alternate
Method

FIGURE 117 CONFIGURING ADJACENT OFFICE (ALTERNATE METHOD)

2. Input User label, and configure required parameters in


Create Adjacent Office dialog box, as shown in Figure 118
by referring to Table 30.
FIGURE 118 CREATE ADJACENT OFFICE DIALOG BOX

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

107

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

TABLE 30 ADJACENT OFFICE P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

User label

Characters or number or
combination of both: 1~40

Unique name
given to adjacent
office

BSC ID

Integer type: 1~5, default


value: 1

Office ID

Integer type: 1~5, default


value: 1

Office type

User can select from MGW,


SMLC or MSC Server
depending on actual
configuration.

Office code

Integer type

Domain type

User can select from


DOMAIN SCN or DOMAIN
IP from drop-down list
depending on actual
configuration.

SPT type

User can select from SEP,


STP, STEP.

SSF

SPC type

108

User can select from Global


Signal Code, global backup
signal code, Signal Code,
and Backup Signal Code.

User can select from OPC 14


and OPC 24 depending on
actual configuration.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

The set of
processes in an
Intelligent
Network (IN) that
provide the
communication
path for
interaction
between a Call
Control Function
(CCF) and a
Service Control
Function (SCF).
14-digit signaling
point code is used
between MSC and
BSC.
24-digit signaling
point code is used
between MSC and
other entity.

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

DPC

Integer type

Within a
Signalling System
No.7 (SS7)
network, the
point codes are
numeric
addresses which
uniquely identify
each signalling
point. The
destination point
code identifies the
receiving
signalling point.

AM

User can select from AM


SURE, AM QUASI, and AM
NONE depending on actual
configuration.

Test ID

User can select from Need


Test and Do Not Need Test
depending on actual
configuration.

Protocol type

User can select from CHINA,


ITU, and ANSI.

Band flag

User can select Yes or No


depending on actual
configuration.

Connection with
local signaling
point.

Protocol types
Attribute for
supported
broadband

3. Click OK, as shown in Figure 118.


END OF STEPS
Result
Related
Information

Adjacent office is successfully configured.


Serving Mobile Location Center (SMLC)
SMLC is either a separate network element or integrated
functionality in the BSC that contains the functionality required
to support Location Services (LCS). The SMLC manages the
overall co-ordination and scheduling of resources required for
the location of a mobile. It also calculates the final location
estimate and estimates the achieved accuracy. The SMLC may
control a number of Location Measurement Unit (LMU) for
obtaining radio interface measurements to locate or help locate
Mobile Station (MS) subscribers in the area that it serves.
Media Gateway (MGW)
MGW is a gateway that supports both bearer traffic and signaling
traffic.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

109

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Configuring Adjacent No. 7 SSN


Steps

To configure adjacent No. 7, perform the following steps:


1. Rightclick Adjacent No. 7 SSN, and click Create
Adjacent No. 7 SSN in the pop-up menu, as shown in
Figure 119.
FIGURE 119 CONFIGURING ADJACENT NO.7SSN

2. Input User label and configure parameters in Create


Adjacent No.7 SSN by referring to Table 31.
FIGURE 120 CREATE ADJACENT NO.7SSN

TABLE 31 - ADJACENT NO 7 SSN P AR AMETERS

110

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Characters or number or combination of


both: 1~40

BSC ID

Integer type: 1~5, default value: 1

Office ID

Integer type

Subsystem No

Integer type: 0~255, default value: 0

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

System tag

User can select Backup subsystem or Only


one subsystem in the drop-down list.

Backup system
office ID

User can select 0 or 1 depending on actual


configuration.

Backup system
office NO

Integer type: 0~255, default value: 0

3. Click OK as shown in Figure 120.


END OF STEPS
Result

Adjacent No. 7 SSN is configured successfully, as shown in


Figure 121.
FIGURE 121 CONFIGURED ADJACENT NO. 7 SSN

Configuring No. 7 PCM


Steps

To configure No. 7 PCM, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click No. 7 PCM Config, and click Create No.7
PCM.
FIGURE 122 CREATING NO.7 PCM

2. Input User label and configure Create No. 7 PCM


parameters as shown in Figure 122 by referring to Table 32.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

111

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

TABLE 32 NO.7 PCM P ARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Characters, numbers or combination of


both: 1~ 40

BSC ID

Integer type: 1~5, default value: 1

Office ID

Integer type

N7 PCM (A interface)

Integer type: 0~1023, default value: 1

Unit (DTB)

User can select unit no. from drop-down


list depending on actual configuration.

PCM

User can select PCM no. from drop-down


list depending on actual configuration.

END OF STEPS

Result

No. 7 PCM is configured successfully, as shown in Figure 123.


FIGURE 123 CONFIGURED NO.7PCM

Configuring No. 7 Link Set


Steps

To configure No. 7 link set, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click No. 7 Link Set config, and click Create No. 7
Link set as shown in Figure 124.
FIGURE 124 CONFIGURING NO 7 LINK SET

2. Input User label and configure parameters in Create No. 7


link set dialog box, as shown in Figure 125, by referring to
Table 33.

112

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

FIGURE 125 CREATING NO. 7 LINK SET

TABLE 33 - CONFIGURING NO.7 LINK SET P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Characters, numbers or combination of


both: 1~40

BSC ID

Integer type: 1~5, default value: 1

Signaling link set No

Integer type: 1~512

Link error calibration


method

User can select Basic or PCR from the


drop-down list depending on actual
configuration.

Type of signaling
link set

User can select from 64K link group or


2M link group from drop-down list
depending on actual configuration.

3. Click OK, as shown in Figure 125.


Note: Link set number appears automatically when link set
are created by user for example 1~512.

END OF STEPS
Result

No. 7 link set is configured successfully as shown in Figure 126.


FIGURE 126 CONFIGURED NO 7 LINK SET

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

113

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Configuring No.7 Link


Steps

To configure No.7 link, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click link set created, and click Create No7 link in
the pop-up menu.
2. Input User label, and configure
parameters as shown in Figure 127.

Create

No.7

link

FIGURE 127 CREATING NO.7 LINK

TABLE 34 NO 7 LINK P ARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Characters or number or
combination of both: 1~40

Link

Integer type: 1~5000

Unit

114

Integer type

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Description

User can select from


drop-down list
depending on actual
configuration.

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Integer type

User can select from


drop-down list
depending on actual
configuration.

TS

Integer type: 1~31

User can select from


drop-down list
depending on actual
configuration.

SMP module

Integer type

User can select SMP


module number from
drop-down list

Link code
SLC

Integer type: 0~15,


default value: 0

PCM

Link info

User can select Link


is Self loop or Link
is not self-loop
dispending on actual
configuration.

END OF STEPS
Result

No. 7 link is configured successfully.

Configuring No. 7 Link Monitor


Steps

To configure No. 7 link monitor, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click No. 7 link monitor config, and click Create
No.7 link monitor in the pop-up menu as shown in Figure
128.
FIGURE 128 CONFIGURING NO.7 LINK MONITOR

2. Input User label, and configure Create No. 7 link monitor


parameters, as shown in Figure 129 by referring to Table 35.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

115

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 129 CREATE NO.7 LINK MONITOR DIALOG BOX

TABLE 35 NO 7 LINK MONITOR P ARAMETERS

116

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Characters or numbers or
combination of both: 1~40

Link

Select from drop-down list


depending on actual
configuration.

Unit No

Integer type

PCM NO

Integer type

PCM start TS

Integer type

LSPB PCM

Integer type: 9~40, default


value: 9

LSPB PCM
start TS

Integer type: 1~31

CSPB PCM

Integer type: 9~40, default


value: 9

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Description

Obtained from
Configured No.7
link. For more
information refer
to Configuring
No.7 Link

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

CSPB PCM
start TS

Integer type: 1~31

Inspect TS
NO

Integer type

Inspect
direction

User can select In direction


or out direction from dropdown list depending on actual
configuration.

Description

3. Click OK, as shown in Figure 129.


END OF STEPS
Result

No. 7 link monitor is configured successfully

No.7 Office Configuration


This section consists of following topics:

Configuring No.7 Route

Configuring No.7 Office

Configuring No.7 Route


Steps

To configure No.7 route, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click NO.7office config, and click Create No7
Route.

Note: Before configuring No.7 Route, make sure that link


set is configured successfully. For more information, refer to
Configuring No. 7 Link Set.

2. Input User label and Configure Create No.7 Route


parameters, as shown in Figure 130, by referring to Table 36.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

117

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 130 CREATING NO. 7 ROUTE

TABLE 36 NO 7 ROUTE P ARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

User label

Characters or number or
combination of both: 1~40

Route

Integer type: 1~1000

Link Set 1

Selected from drop-down list


depending on configuration

Obtained from
configured link
set under sigtran

Link Set 2

Selected from drop-down list


depending on configuration

Obtained from
configured link
set under sigtran

Link
arrangement
mode

User can select Random or


SLS_bit0 etc from dropdown list depending on actual
configuration.

END OF STEPS
Result

No.7 route is configured successfully.

Creating No.7 Office


Steps

To configure No.7 office, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click No.7office config, and click Create NO7
office.
2. Input User label and configure all the parameters in Create
No.7 office dialog box, as shown in Figure 131, by referring
to Figure 130.

118

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

FIGURE 131 CREATING NO. 7 OFFICE

TABLE 37 - CREATING NO. 7 OFFICE PARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

User label

Characters or number or
combination of both: 1~40

BSC ID

Integer type

Office ID

Selected from drop-down list

Route 1

User can select from dropdown list depending on


configured route for office ID.

Obtained from
configured No. 7
route

Route 2

User can select from dropdown list depending on


configured route for office ID

Obtained from
configured No. 7
route

Route 3

User can select from dropdown list depending on


configured route for office ID

Obtained from
configured No. 7
route

Route 4

User can select from dropdown list depending on


configured route for office ID

Obtained from
configured No. 7
route

3. Click OK, as shown in Figure 131.


END OF STEPS
Result

No. 7 office is configured successfully.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

119

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Configuring Application Server (AS


Steps

To configure Application Server (AS), perform the following


steps:
1. Right-click A Interface related config, and click Create
AS in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 132.
F I G U R E 1 3 2 C O N F I G U R I N G AS

2. Input User label under Basic config, and configure create


AS parameters, as shown in Figure 133 by referring Table 38.
FIGURE 133 CREATE AS DIALOG BOX (BASIC CONFIG)

TABLE 38 APPLICATION SERVER BASIC CONFIG P ARAMETERS

120

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Characters or number or combination of


both: 1~40

BSC ID

Integer type: 1~5, default value: 1

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Application server
ID

Integer type: 1~64, default value: 1

Protocol

User can select M3UA or SUA from dropdown list depending upon actual
configuration.

Exist context

User can select False or True From dropdown list depending on actual
configuration.

TAG

User can select from SGP, ASP,


IPSP_SERVER, or IPSP_Client from the
drop-down list.

TUP client

User can select YES or No from drop down


list depending on actual configuration.

ISUP client

User can select YES or No from drop down


list depending on actual configuration.

SCCP client

User can select YES or No from drop down


list depending on actual configuration.

Service mode

User can select Override or Participate


from drop-down list depending on actual
configuration.

Mode N

Integer type: 0~16, default value: 0

Mode K

Integer type: 0~15, default value: 0

ASP number

Integer type: 0~16, default value: 0

Note:

When mode is participate mode, MODE N plus MODE K


must equal ASPNUM.
When MODEA is override, MODE N and MODE K must be zero.

3. Select number in spin box, and click Add to locate it under


SSN type.
4. Click ASP ID tab, and configure parameters in the Create
AS dialog box, by referring to Table 39.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

121

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 134 CREATE AS DIALOG BOX (ASP ID)

TABLE 39 APPLICATION SERVER P AR AM ETERS (ASP ID)

Parameter

ASP ID 1

ASP ID 2

ASP ID 3

ASP ID 4

ASP ID 5

122

Type and
Range

Description

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

Parameter

ASP ID 6

ASP ID 7

ASP ID 8

ASP ID 9

ASP ID 10

ASP ID 11

ASP ID 12

ASP ID 13

ASP ID 14

ASP ID 15

Type and
Range

Description

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

123

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

ASP ID 16

Type and
Range

Description

Integer type

User can select it from dropdown list ASP ID depends on


configured ASP. Refer to
Configuring Application Server
Process.

5. Click OK, as shown in Figure 134.


END OF STEPS
Result

Application server is successfully configured.

Configuring Office Guide


Purpose
Prerequisites
Step

To configure office guide


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure office guide, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click A interface related config, and click Office
guide in the pop-up menu as shown in Figure 135.
FIGURE 135 CONFIGURING OFFICE GUIDE

124

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

2. Input parameter information under Local office config, and


click Next as shown in Figure 136. Configure Local office
config parameters by referring to Table 40.
FIGURE 136 CONFIGURING OFFICE GUIDE (LOCAL OFFICE CONFIG

TABLE 40 - OFFICE GUIDE CONFIGURATION P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and
Range

Description
User can select net type from
drop-down list.

NET
User Type

Integer type

User can select from spin box.

OPC 14

Integer type

14-digit signaling point code is


used between MSC and BSC.

OPC 24

Integer type

24-digit signaling point code is


used between MSC and other
entity.

Netapp Info

User can select Netapp Disable


or Netapp Enable depending on
actual configuration.

3. Click Adjacent office tab, and configure parameters.


Configure Adjacent office parameters by referring to Table
41. Click Add to allocate the configured information to
Office ID, as shown in Figure 137.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

125

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 137 CONFIGURING OFFICE GUIDE ( ADJACENT OFFICE)

T AB L E 4 1 OF F I C E GU I D E C O N F I G U R AT I O N P AR AM E T E R S ( AD J AC E N T OF F I C E

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Office ID

Integer type

User can select office ID


from spin box.

Office code

Integer type

Drop down list

User can select Domain


SCN or Domain IP from
drop-down list depending
on actual configuration.

Office type

Drop down list

User can select office type


from drop-down list
depending on actual
configuration.

AM

User can select from


AM SURE, AM QUASI,
and AM NONE
depending on actual
configuration.

Connection with local


signaling point

Protocol type

User can select from


CHINA, ITU, and
ANSI.

User can select from dropdown list depending on


actual configuration.

Ssf

User can select from


drop-down list
depending on actual
configuration.

SSF block all types of


unwanted and harmful
SMS traffic.

SPC type

Configured as SPC14 or
SPC 24, depending on
the actual
configuration.

Domain type

126

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

DPC

Integer type

Destination Point identifies


the destination of the TUP.

Signaling End
Point (SEP)

SPT type

Test ID

Signaling Transfer
Point (STP)
Signaling
Transfer/End
Point (STEP)

User can select from


drop-down
list
depending on actual
configuration

User can select NEEDS


TEST or DO NOT
NEED TEST

4. Click N7PCM tab, and configure parameters. Click Add to


allocate configured parameters to Office ID, as shown in
Figure 138.
FIGURE 138 OFFICE GUIDE CONFIGURATION (N7PCM)

5. Click LOCN7SSN, and configure parameters. Click Add to


allocate configured parameters to OFFICEID, as shown in
Figure 139.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

127

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 139 OFFICE GUIDE CONFIGURATION (LOCN7SSN)

6. Click Signal link set, and configure parameters. Click Add


to allocate configured parameters to Link Set, as shown in
Figure 140.
FIGURE 140 OFFICE GUIDE CONFIGURATION (SIGNAL LINK SET)

7. Click Signal link, and configure parameters. Click Add to


allocate configured parameters to Link, as shown in Figure
141. Click Next >>.

128

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

FIGURE 141 OFFICE GUIDE CONFIGURATION (SIGNAL LINK)

8. Click Signal route, and configure parameters. Click Add to


allocate configured parameters to Route, as shown in Figure
142.
FIGURE 142 OFFICE GUIDE CONFIGURATION (SIGNAL ROUTE)

9. Click No.7 office, and configure parameters. Click Add to


allocate configured parameters to Office ID, as shown in
Figure 143. Click Finish.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

129

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 143 OFFICE GUIDE CONFIGURATION (NO. 7 OFFICE)

END OF STEPS
Result

Office guide is successfully configured.

Configuring SIGTRAN
SIGTRAN for Signaling Transport is the standard telephony
protocol used to transport Signaling System 7 (SS7) signals over
the Internet.
SIGTRAN configuration consists of creating Application server
process (ASP), M3UA, and SUA.

Configuring Application Server


Process
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure Application Server Process (ASP)


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32
client is running normally.
To create Application
following steps:

Server

Process

(ASP),

perform

the

1. Right-click Sigtran config, and click Create ASP, as


shown in Figure 144.

130

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

FIGURE 144 CREATING APPLICATION SERVER PROCESS

2. Click ASP basic config, and input User label and configure
parameters as shown in Figure 145, by referring to Table 42.
FIGURE 145 - CREATE ASP ( ASP BASIC CONFIGURATION)

TABLE 42 - ASP CONFIGURATION P AR AM ETERS (BASIC CONFIG)

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Characters or number or combination of


both: 1~40

BSC ID

Integer type: 1~5, default value: 1

ASP ID

Integer type: 0~1024, default value: 1

SCTP ID

Integer type: 0~1024, default value: 1

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

131

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Module

User can select from drop-down list


depending on actual configuration.

Protocol type

User can select from M3UA or SUA


depending on actual configuration.

Office ID

Integer type

SEQ

Integer type: 0~255, default value: 0

Property

User can select from Server or Client


depending on actual configuration.

Local Port

Integer type: 1~65536, default value: 1

Remote Port

Integer type: 1~65536, default value: 1

3. Click Other config and configure parameters under other


config tab by referring Table 43.
FIGURE 146 CREATING ASP (ASP OTHER CONFIG)

TABLE 43 ASP CONFIGURATION P AR AM ETERS (OTHER P AR AMETERS)

132

Parameter

Type and Range

In streams

Integer type: 1~17, default value: 16

Out streams

Integer type: 1~17, default value: 16

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Maximum retry
number

Integer type: 3~5, default value: 5

MAX RTO(10ms)

Integer type: 500~3000, default value:


3000

MIN RTO(10ms)

Integer type: 20~100, default value: 100

INIT RTO (10ms)

Integer type: 20~3000, default value: 300

Heartbeat (10ms)

Integer type: 50~3000, default value:


3000

MAX burst

Integer type: 0 ~127, default value: 4

Fixed

User can select from Yes or No depending


on actual configuration.

SCTP maximum
retry numbers

Integer type: 1~20, default value: 10

Delay (10ms)

Integer type: 1~20, default value: 20

4. Click IP config tab, and configure IP config parameters as


shown in Figure 147, by referring to Table 44.
FIGURE 147 - CREATE ASP (IP CONFIGURATION)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

133

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

TABLE 44 ASP CONFIGURATION P AR AM ETERS (IP CONFIG)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Local IP
ADDR 1

Integer type

Local IP address

Local IP
ADDR 2

Integer type

Local IP address

Local IP
ADDR 3

Integer type

Local IP address

Local IP
ADDR 4

Integer type

Local IP address

Remote IP
ADDR 1

Integer type

Remote IP
address

Remote IP
ADDR 2

Integer type

Remote IP
address

Remote IP
ADDR 3

Integer type

Remote IP
address

Remote IP
ADDR 4

Integer type

Remote IP
address

5. Click ASP config, and configure ASP config parameters, by


referring to Table 45. Click OK to configure ASP parameters.
F I G U R E 1 4 8 C R E A T E A S P ( AS P C O N F I G U R A T I O N )

TABLE 45 - ASP CONFIGURATION P AR AM ETERS (ASP CONFIG)

Parameter

Type and Range

Looped

User can select from Yes or No from dropdown list depending on actual configuration.

Locked

User can select from Yes or No from dropdown list depending on actual configuration.

Note: One AS has maximum 16 Application Server Process


(ASP).
END OF STEPS
Result

134

ASP is configured successfully, as shown in Figure 149.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

FIGURE 149 CONFIGURED ASP

Configuring M3UA
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure MTP 3 User Application Part (M3UA)


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32
client is running normally.
To configure M3UA, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click M3UA config, and click Create M3UA in the
pop-up menu.
2. Input User label and configure parameters in Create M3UA
dialog box, as shown in Figure 150 by referring to Table 46.
FIGURE 150 CONFIGURING M3UA

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

135

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

TABLE 46 M3U A P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User Label

Characters or
number or
combination of both:
1~40

BSC ID

Integer type: 1~5,


default value: 1

Description

Within an SS7 network, the


point codes are numeric
addresses which uniquely
identify each signalling
point. The OPC identifies
the sending signalling point.

OPC

136

User can input the


OPC depending upon
actual configuration.

SIO

User can select from


Invalid, SCCP, TCP,
and ISUP from
dropdown list
depending on actual
configuration.

Application
server ID

Integer type

TAG

Integer type: 0~1,


default value: 1

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

The relation of OPC is


complex. In different
networking, the tables
related to OPC are different.
For example, for the
messages forwarded by the
Gateway, OPC is correlated
to R_OFFICE table. If the
messages sent by the local
office are required to be
related to R_OPC table,
OPC need no routing, and
at this time, the value takes
0, which is invalid.
The Service Information
Octet field in a Message
Signalling Unit (MSU)
contains the 4-bit subservice field followed by the
4-bit service indicator. The
sub service field contains
the network indicator (e.g.,
national or international)
and the message priority (0
~3 with 3 being the highest
priority). Message priority is
considered only under
congestion conditions, not
to control the order in
which messages are
transmitted. Low priority
messages may be discarded
during periods of
congestion.

Chapter 4 - A Interface Configuration

3. Click OK to configure M3UA.


END OF STEPS
Result

M3UA is configured successfully, as shown in Figure 151.


FIGURE 151 CONFIGURED M3UA

Configuring SUA
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure SCCP-User Adaptation (SUA)


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32
client is running normally.
To configure SUA, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click SUA config, and click Create SUA in the popup menu.
2. Input User label in Create SUA dialog box, and click OK, as
shown in Figure 152.
FIGURE 152 CONFIGURING SUA

Related
Information

Sub System Number (SSN)


The Signalling Connection Control Part (SCCP) function uses the
SSN to determine the local subsystem.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

137

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

END OF STEPS
Result

SUA is configured successfully, as shown in Figure 153.


FIGURE 153 CONFIGURED SUA

138

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter

Gb Interface Configuration
This chapter instructs the Gb interface configuration. It includes
NSE, NSVC and BRCH configurations.

Configuring NSE
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure Network Service Entity (NSE)


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 is running successfully.
To configure NSE, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click GB interface related config, and click Create
NSE in the pop-up menu as shown in Figure 154.
FIGURE 154 CONFIGURING NSE

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

139

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

2. Input User label, and click OK, as shown in Figure 155.


FIGURE 155 CONFIGURING NSE DIALOG BOX

END OF STEPS
Result

NSE is configured successfully as shown in Figure 156.


FIGURE 156 CONFIGURED NSE

Configuring BRCH
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure Broadcast Channel (BRCH)


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 is running successfully.
To configure BRCH, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click GB interface related config, and click Create
BRCH in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 154.
FIGURE 157 CONFIGURING BRCH

140

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 5 - Gb Interface Configuration

2. Input User label, and configure create BRCH parameters,


as shown in Figure 158, by referring to Table 47, and click
OK.
FIGURE 158 CREATE BRCH DIALOG BOX

TABLE 47 BRCH P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

User label

Characters or number or
combination of both: 1~40

Unique label
given to function

Link

Integer type: 1~1000,


default value: 1

User can select


from spin box
depending on
actual
configuration

CPU ID

User can select from drop


down list depending on
actual configuration.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

141

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Channel

Type and Range


Integer type: 1~256,
default value: 1

Unit

Selected from drop-down


list depending on actual
configuration

PCM No

Selected from drop-down


list depending on actual
configuration

MCC START
TIME SLOT

PCM time slot

Access rate

N391

N392
N393

T391

Description
User can select
from spin box
depending on
actual
configuration

Integer type: 0~31

Selected
from
spin
box
depending
on
actual
configuration

Integer type: 0~31

Selected from
spin box
depending on
actual
configuration

Integer type: 0~31

Selected from
spin box
depending on
actual
configuration

Integer type: 5~30


Default value: 5
Integer type: 3~8
Default value: 3
Integer type: 4~10
Default value: 4
Integer type
Default: 1000

Complete state
detection
counter.
Error detection
counter
State detection
counter.
Polling timer; the
value ranges
from 500 to 3000
in the unit of 10
ms.

END OF STEPS
Result

BRCH is configured successfully as shown in Figure 159.


FIGURE 159 CONFIGURED BRCH

142

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 5 - Gb Interface Configuration

Configuring NSVC
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure Network Service Virtual Connection (NSVC)


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 is running successfully.
To configure NSVC, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click Gb interface related config Create NSVC
in the pop-up menu as in Figure 160.
FIGURE 160 CONFIGURING NSVC DIALOG BOX

2. Input User label and configure NSVC parameters as shown


in Figure 161, by referring to Table 48.
FIGURE 161 NSVC CREATE INTERFACE

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

143

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

TABLE 48 NSVC P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Characters or
number or
combination of both:
1~40

BSC ID

Integer type: 1~255

NSVC ID

Integer type:
0~65535, default
value: 0
It is a selection box
and its data come
from the NSE.

NSE ID

3.

Description

DLCI

Integer type:
16~991, default
value: 16

The DLCI value should


be consistent with the
SGSN. It is a planned
value.

BRCH link

Integer type

It is a selection list
and its data come
from the BRCH.

BE

Integer type:
100~200, default
value: 100 in the
unit of bits

Excessive size of the


burst packet

BC(KB)

Integer type:
640~30720, default
value: 640

Committed burst
packet size.

TC(10ms)

Integer type:
1000~1500, default
value: 1000

Network testing time

Click OK as shown in Figure 161.

END OF STEPS
Result

NSVC is configured successfully as shown in Figure 162.


FIGURE 162 CONFIGURED NSVC

144

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter

Site Configuration
This chapter consists of the following topics:

Configuring Site

Configuring B8018

Configuring B8112

Configuring M8202

Configuring M8206

Configuring BS20

Configuring BS21

Configuring OB06

Configuring Site by Template

Deleting Site

Configuring Site
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure a site
Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure site, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click Site config, and click Create Site in the popup menu, as shown in Figure 163.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

145

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 163 CREATING SITE

2. Input the parameter information in the Create Site dialog


box, by referring to Table 49.
FIGURE 164 CREATE SITE DIALOG BOX

146

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

TABLE 49 CREATE SITE PARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

User label

Characters or number or
combination of both: 1~40

Name for users to


identify the objects

Site ID

Integer type: 1~1536,


default value: 1

Serial number of this


cell

Site type

Select Site type from the


drop-down list as shown in
Figure 164.

Type of site

Integer type: 180 ~+180

Measured from prime


meridian with positive
value going east and
negative value going
west

Integer type: 90 ~+90

Latitude is measured
from equator with
positive value going
north and negative
value going south.
Marked Longitude and
Latitude value gives
exact site location.

Integer type: 3,4,7,8.

User can select module


number
from
dropdown list as shown in
Figure 163.

Select Network or
Internal form drop-down
list.

Clock Synchronization
type: Internal Clock
(clock obtained from
crystal oscillator) or
Net
Clock
(clock
obtained from BSC).
User can select Internal
Clock or Net Clock.

Longitude

Latitude

Module
number

Clock
source

3. Click OK to configure selected site in Site type.


END OF STEPS
Result

Site is successfully configured.

Configuring B8018
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure B8018 Site


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
successfully and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure B8018, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click Site config, and click Create Site in the popup menu, as shown in Figure 165.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

147

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 165 CREATING SITE

2. Input the User label, and select B8018 as Site type in dropdown list as shown in Figure 166, configure Create site
parameters by referring to Table 50, and click OK.
TABLE 50 SITE P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

User label

Characters or number or
combination of both: 1~40

Name for users to


identify the objects

Site ID

Integer type: 1~1536,


default value: 1

Serial number of this


site

Site type

Select Site type from the


drop-down list as shown in
Figure 166

Type of site, in this


case is B8018

Integer type:180 ~+180

Measured from
prime meridian with
positive value going
east and negative
value going west

Longitude

148

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Integer type: 90 ~+90

Latitude is measured
from equator with
positive value going
north and negative
value going south.
Marked Longitude
and Latitude value
gives exact site
location.

Integer type: 3,4,7,8.

User
can
select
module number from
drop-down list as
shown in Figure 166.

Clock source

Select Network or
Internal form drop-down
list.

Clock
Synchronization
type: Internal Clock
(clock obtained from
crystal oscillator) or
Net
Clock
(clock
obtained from BSC).
User
can
select
Internal Clock or Net
Clock.

Connect
mode

User can select connect


mode from drop down list.

Latitude

Module
number

FIGURE 166 CONFIGURING B8018

3. Right-click Site device config under bts1 node (bts1 is user


label for site inputted in Create site dialog box) and click
Create Site rack in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure
167.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

149

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 167 CREATING SITE RACK

4. Click OK, as shown in Figure 168.


FIGURE 168 CREATE SITE RACK DIALOG BOX

5. Double-click Site rack under Site device config, and


B8018 rack view appears on right pane, as shown in Figure
169.
FIGURE 169 B8018 RACK VIEW

150

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

6. Right-click B8018 rack, and click Create shelf as shown


Figure 170, and click OK as shown in Figure 171 and the
created shelf appears as shown in Figure 170.
FIGURE 170 CREATING B8018 SHELF

FIGURE 171 CREATING B8018 SHELF (CONFIRM ATION MESSAGE)

FIGURE 172 CREATED SHELF OF B8018

Configuring PDM Panel


Steps

To configure PDM panel, perform the following steps:

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

151

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

1. Right-click shelf no. 4 panel no. 1, and click Create panel


in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 173.
FIGURE 173 CONFIGURING PDM P ANEL

2. Click OK, as shown in Figure 174.


FIGURE 174 CREATE PDM P ANEL MESSAGE BOX

END OF STEPS
Result

PDM panel is configured successfully as shown in Figure 175.


FIGURE 175 CONFIGURED PDM P ANEL

152

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

Configuring CMB panel


Steps

To configure CMB panel, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click shelf no. 4 panel no. 2, and click Create panel
in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 176.
FIGURE 176 CONFIGURING CMB P ANEL

2. Select Connect model as BSC and Connect Type as


connect; click Connect, as shown in Figure 177. Information
about available PCM lines appears as shown in Figure 178.
Select the desired PCM and click OK. Create CMB panel
interface with the PCM information appears as shown in
Figure 179. Configure CMB board parameters by referring to
Table 51.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

153

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 177 CREATING CMB P ANEL (PCM NO.)

3. Select row under PCM LINES, and click OK as shown in


Figure 178.
FIGURE 178 PCM LINES

154

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

FIGURE 179 CREATING CMB P ANEL (TS NO.) - 1

to allocate it to Abis
4. Select row under TS No and click
Res and select Abis Pool No from spin box. Select row
under TS No, and click the lower

to allocate it to OMU.

5. Click OK, as shown in Figure 180 to configure CMB panel.


FIGURE 180 CREATING CMB P ANEL (TS NO.) - 2

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

155

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 181 CONFIGURING CMB P ANEL

6. Right-click Shelf no. 4 Panel no. 3 in common shelf, and


click Create panel in the pop-up menu. Click OK to
configure CMB panel in panel 3, as shown in Figure 182.
FIGURE 182 CONFIGURING FURTHER CMB P ANEL

Table 51 describes Abis pool parameters.


TABLE 51 ABIS POOL P ARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Connect type

User can select from Disconnect, BSC or


Site in Connect Model.

Ts No

Integer type:1~31,

OMU TS No.

Integer type: 16 and 25~31

AbisPoolNo

Integer type: 1~2000

END OF STEPS
Result

CMB panel is successfully configured.

Configuring EIB Panel


Steps

To configure EIB panel, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click shelf no. 4 panel no. 4, and click Create panel
in the pop-up menu as shown in Figure 183.

156

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

FIGURE 183 CREATING EIB P ANEL

2. EIB create panel dialog box appears as shown in Figure 184.


Click OK, to configure EIB panel.
FIGURE 184 CREATE P ANEL DIALOG BOX (EIB P ANEL)

END OF STEPS
Result

EIB panel is configured successfully.

Configuring CDU Panel


Steps

To configure CDU panel, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click on panel no. 1 in radio shelf and then click
Create Panel in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 185.
FIGURE 185 CONFIGURING CDU P ANEL

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

157

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

2. Select Panel Type as CDU8M or CDU10M from the dropdown list and click OK, as shown in Figure 186.
FIGURE 186 CONFIGURING CDU P ANEL DIALOG BOX

For information on Panel Type refer to Table 52.


TABLE 52 PANEL TYPES

Unit
Name

Module Name
CDUG
BCDUG
CCDUG
RCDUG_8M

CDU
RCDUG_10M
CDUD
CDUC
CDUP
CEU

158

CEUG

Working Frequency
Rx: 890 MHz - 915 MHz
Tx: 935 MHz - 960 MHz
Rx: 880 MHz - 905 MHz
Tx: 925 MHz - 950 MHz
Rx: 885 MHz - 910 MHz
Tx: 930 MHz - 955 MHz
Rx: 882 MHz - 890 MHz
Tx: 927 MHz - 935M Hz
Rx: 880 MHz - 890 MHz
Tx: 925 MHz - 935 MHz
Rx: 1710 MHz - 1785 MHz
Tx: 1805 MHz - 1880 MHz
Rx: 824 MHz - 849 MHz
Tx: 869 MHz- 894 MHz
Rx: 1850 MHz - 1910 MHz
Tx: 1930 MHz - 1990 MHz
Rx: 880 MHz - 915 MHz
Tx: 925 MHz - 960 MHz

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

Unit
Name

Module Name
CEUD
CEUC
CEUP

Working Frequency
Rx: 1710 MHz - 1785 MHz
Tx: 1805 MHz - 1880 MHz
Rx: 824 MHz - 849 MHz
Tx: 869 MHz - 894 MHz
Rx: 1850 MHz - 1910 MHz
Tx: 1930 MHz - 1990 MHz

END OF STEPS
Result

CDU panel is configured successfully.

Configuring DTRU Panel


Steps

To configure DTRU panel, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click slot no. 2 in B8018 radio shelf and click Create
panel in the pop-up menu.
2. Select row under MUL HYC PANEL, and select row under
port type TX, as shown in Figure 187. Click Add to add row
selected in MULHYC connect to Port Type TX.
3. Perform the same procedure to configure RX and RXD in the
left and right pane of MULHYC Connect, select TRX mode
parameters by referring Table 53 and click OK to configure
DTRU.

Note: IRC interference refuses the combination, is similar to


MRC. When the diversity antenna is used, the two antennas (or,
one crossover polarity antenna) receives the radio signals at the
same time and sends the better (Stronger) signals to BTS
receiver unit.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

159

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 187 CREATE DTRU P ANEL DIALOG BOX

TABLE 53 TRX MODE P ARAMETERS

Work Mode

Description

Dual carrier mode

No four-way diversity
configuration and no DPCT
setting configuration, DTRU can
configure both the left and the
right sub boards.

Odd carrier
modes

Odd carrier with


4-way diversity
reception

Only configure Four-way


diversity. DTRU only configures
the left sub board, and the right
sub board has no data
configuration.

Odd carrier with


4-way diversity
reception and
DPCT

Four-way diversity plus DPCT.


DTRU only configures the left sub
boards, and the right sub board
has no data configuration.

Odd carrier

No Four-way diversity, no DPCT


setting. DTRU only configures the
left sub board, and the right sub
board has no data configuration.
IRC

IRC

User can check or


uncheck IRC
check box
depending on
actual
configuration.

Interference Resistance
Combination

4. Repeat step 1~3 for configuring DTRU in shelf no. 1~3 of


the B8018 rack.

160

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

END OF STEPS
Result

DTRU panel is configured successfully.

Configuring CEU Panel


Steps

To configure CEU panel perform the following steps:


1. Right-click in slot no 8 in B8018 radio shelf and click
Create Panel in the pop-up menu as shown in Figure 188.
FIGURE 188 CONFIGURING CEU P ANEL

2. Select CEU in the Panel Type and click OK, as shown in


Figure 189.
FIGURE 189 CONFIGURING CEU P ANEL (SELECTING PANEL TYPE)

Note: Follow the same procedure for configuring RDU


panel, the only difference is RDU is selected in panel type.
END OF STEPS

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

161

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Result

CEU panel is configured successfully.


Figure 190 shows the B8018 configured rack.
FIGURE 190 B8018 CONFIGURED RACK

Configuring B8112
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure B8112 site


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure B8112, perform the following steps:
1. For initial configuration, refer to Configuring Site. The only
difference is that the site type selected is B8112.

162

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

2. Right-click B8112 Rack shelf no 3, and click Create shelf


as shown in Figure 191. Click OK in Create shelf dialog box
to configure B8112 AEM shelf.
FIGURE 191 CONFIGURING B8122

3. Right-click on slot no. 1 in B8112 AEM shelf, and then click


Create Panel in the pop-up menu.
FIGURE 192 CONFIGURING CDU

4. User can configure CDU10M, CDU8M, CEU, and RDU by


selecting different type in Panel Type drop-down list.
Configuration of CDU10M is considered here for example.
5. Select Panel Type as CDU10M. For more information on
configuring CDU, refer to Configuring CDU Panel.
6. User can configure CDU from slot no. 2 ~ 6, in B8112 AEM
shelf.
7. Configure PDM panel in slot no. 7 of B8112 AEM shelf.
8. Right-click shelf no. 2 in B8122 rack and click Create shelf
in the pop-up menu. Click OK in Create shelf dialog box to
configure B8122 CMB shelf.
9. Right-click slot no. 1 in B8112 CMB shelf and configure
DTRU.
10. Configure DTRU panel in slot no. 1 ~ 12, in B8122 CMB
shelf.
11. Configure CMB panel in slot no. 13 ~ 14. For more
information on CMB panel configuration, refer to Configuring
CMB panel.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

163

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

12. Right-click in slot no. 15 and then click Create Panel in the
pop-up menu. Click OK in Create Panel dialog box to
configure EIB panel.

Configuring EAM Panel


13. Right-click in slot no. 16 and then click Create Panel in the
pop-up menu. Click OK in Create panel dialog box to
configure EAM panel.
END OF STEPS
Result

B8112 is configured successfully, as shown in Figure 193.


FIGURE 193 CONFIGURED B8112

Configuring M8202
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure M8202 site


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure M8202, perform the following steps:
1. For initial configuration refer to Configuring Site the only
difference is that the Site Type selected is M8202.

164

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

2. Right-click on Site device config, and click Create site


rack in the pop-up menu, click OK in Create site rack
dialog-box to add Site Rack node in topology tree.
3. Double-click on Site rack node, and M8202 rack view
appears on the right pane as shown in Figure 194.
FIGURE 194 CONFIGURING M8202

4. Right-click shelf no. 2 in M8202 and click Create shelf in the


pop-up menu, click OK in Create shelf dialog box to
configure M8202 common shelf.
FIGURE 195 CONFIGURING M8202 COMMON SHELF

5. Right-click in slot no. 1 in M8202 common shelf and then


click Create Panel in the pop-up menu. Click OK in Create
Panel dialog box to configure PDM panel.
6. Right-click in slot no. 2 in M8202 common shelf and
configure CMB panel. For CMB panel configuration, refer to
Configuring CMB panel. The only difference is Panel type
selected is CMB.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

165

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

7. Right-click in slot no. 4 in M8202 common shelf, and then


click Create Panel in the pop-up menu. Click OK in Create
panel dialog box to configure EIB panel.
8. Right-click in shelf no. 1 in M8202 rack and click Create
shelf in the pop-up menu. Click OK in Create shelf dialog
box to configure M8202 radio shelf.
9. Right-click in slot no. 1 in M8202 radio shelf and click
Create panel in the pop-up menu. Click OK in Create
panel dialog box to configure MDUP panel.
10. Right-click in slot no. 2 in M8202 radio shelf and configure
DTRU. For DTRU configuration, refer to Configuring DTRU.
END OF STEPS
Result

M8202 is configured successfully, as shown in Figure 196.


FIGURE 196 M8202 CONFIGURED RACK

Configuring M8206
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure M8206 site


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure M8206, perform the following steps:
1. For initial configuration refer to Configuring Site, the only
difference is that the Site Type selected is M8206.
2. Right-click Site device config and click Create site rack in
the pop-up menu, click OK in Create site rack dialog box to
add Site Rack node in topology tree.
3. Double-click Site rack node, and M8206 rack view appears
on the right pane.

166

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

4. Right-click shelf in no. 4 in M8206 rack and click Create


shelf in the pop-up menu. Click OK in Create shelf dialog
box to configure M8206 common shelf.
5. Right-click in slot no. 1 in M8206 common shelf and
configure PDM panel.
6. Configure CMB panel in slot no. 2 M8206 common shelf.
For CMB panel configuration, refer to Configuring CMB panel.
7. Right-click slot in slot no. 4 in M8206 common shelf and
then click Create Panel in the pop-up menu. Click OK in
Create Panel dialog box to configure EIB panel.
8. Right-click in shelf no. 1~3 in M8206 rack, and click Create
shelf in the pop-up menu. Click OK in Create shelf dialog
box to configure M8206 radio shelf.
9. Configure MDUP panel in slot no. 1 and 9 of M8206 radio
shelf.
10. Configure MTRU in slot no. 2~5 of M8206 radio shelf. For
DTRU panel configuration, refer to Configuring DTRU.
Note: When dual carrier mode is selected, second MTRU
panel must be connected with a MULHYC panel, which is on the
right side of the second MTRU panel, and both belong to the
same shelf.
11. Configure MDUP in slot no. 6 of M8206 radio shelf.
END OF STEPS
Result

M8206 is configured successfully, as shown in Figure 197

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

167

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 197 CONFIGURED M8206 BTS

Configuring BS20
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure BS20 site


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC rack is
configured and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure BS20, perform the following steps:
1. For initial site configuration, refer to Configuring Site, the
only difference is that the site type selected is BS20.
2. Right-click Site device config and click Create Site rack
in the pop-up menu as shown in Figure 198.

168

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

FIGURE 198 CONFIGURING BS20

3. Click OK in Create rack dialog box.


4. Double click on Site rack, and site rack appears on the right
pane.
5. Right-click on BS20 rack, and click Create shelf in the popup menu.
6. Right-click in rack no. 1 shelf no. 4 slot no. 1, and
configure PDM panel. For more information on configuring
PDM panel, refer to Configuring PDM Panel.

Configuring CMM Panel


Steps

To configure CMM panel, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click in rack no. 1 shelf no. 4 slot no. 2, and click
Create panel in the pop-up menu, click OK to configure
CMM panel.
2. Select Connect mode as BSC and Connect Type as
connect; click Connect as shown in Figure 199. For more
information on CMM board parameters, refer to Table 54.
TABLE 54 CMM BOARD PAR AMETERS

Parameter

Value

Connect type

User can select from Disconnect, BSC or


Site in Connect Model.

Ts No.

Integer type:1~31

OMU TS No.

Integer type: 16 and 25~31

Abis Pool No

Integer type: 1~2000

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

169

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 199 CREATING CMM P ANEL (PCM NO.)

3. Select row under PCM LINES, and click OK as shown in


Figure 200.
FIGURE 200 PCM LINES

4. Select row under TS No and click


to allocate it to Abis
Res. User can select Abis Pool No from spin box select row
under TS No, and click the lower
as shown in Figure 201.

170

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

to allocate it to OMU,

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

FIGURE 201 CREATING CMM P ANEL (TS NO)

5. Click OK to configure CMM panel.


6. To configure another CMM panel, Right-click in rack no. 1
shelf no. 4 Slot no. 3, and click Create panel. Click OK in
CMM Panel dialog box to add CMM panel.
END OF STEPS
Result

CMM panel is configured successfully.

Configuring CDU Panel


For configuring CDU panel, refer to Configuring CDU Panel.

Configuring TRM
Steps

To configure TRM, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click in rack no. 1 shelf no. 3 slot no. 2, and click
Create panel in the pop-up menu.
2. Select TRM, STRU, or TRME in Panel Type drop-down list
depending on actual configuration as shown in Figure 202.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

171

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 202 CONFIGURING TRM P ANEL (BASIC INFO)

3. Click MULHYC Connect, and select row under MULHYC


PANEL. Select row under Port Type for example, TX row
and click Add to add TX as shown in Figure 203. For
configuring RX and RXD repeat step 3.
FIGURE 203 CONFIGURING TRM P ANEL (MUL HYC CONNECT)

4. Click OK to configure TRM panel.


5. Repeat step 2 ~ 4 in configuring TRM panel for configuring
shelf no. 2 and shelf no. 1.

Configuring SPAU
Note: While configuring TRM, TRME, and STRU user can
configure the immediate panel on right side of configured panel
as SPAU depending on actual configuration. SPAU configuration
is similar to TRM configuration. For more information refer to
Configuring TRM; the only difference is Panel Type is SPAU in
Panel Type drop-down list.

172

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

END OF STEPS
Result

TRM panel is configured successfully.


Configured BS20 BTS is shown in Figure 204.
FIGURE 204 CONFIGURED BS20

Configuring TRME
Steps

To configure TRME panel repeat step 2 ~ 4 in Configuring TRM,


the only difference is user needs to select Panel Type as TRME.
Note: TRME is configured if user wants to support EDGE
functionality.

Result

TRME is configured successfully as shown in Figure 205.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

173

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 205 CONFIGURED TRME P ANEL

Configuring STRU
Steps

To configure STRU repeat step 2 ~ 4 in Configuring TRM, the


only difference is type of panel selected in Panel Type is STRU.
Note: While configuring STRU user needs to configure
immediate right panel as SPAU.

Result

STRU is configured if user wants to configure 80W BTS site.

STRU is configured successfully, as shown in Figure 206.


FIGURE 206 CONFIGURING STRU

Configuring BS21 (V2.0


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure BS21 (V2.0) site


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC rack is
configured and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure BS21 (V2.0), perform the following steps:
1. For initial site configuration, refer to Configuring Site, the
only difference is that the site type selected is BS21 (V2.0).
2. Right-click Site device config, and click Create Site
rack in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 207.

174

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

FIGURE 207 CONFIGURING BS21 (V2.0)

3. Right-click in rack no. 1 shelf no. 3, and then click Create


Shelf in the pop-up menu to configure BS21V2.0 shelf.
4. Configure CDU in slot no. 1 and slot no. 7. For more
information on CDU panel configuration, refer to Configuring
CDU Panel.
5. Configure TRM in slot no. 2 and 5. For more information,
refer to Configuring TRM.
6. Configure CMM in slot no. 6. For more information, refer to
Configuring CMM Panel.
END OF STEPS
Result

BS 21 (V2.0) is configured successfully.


FIGURE 208 CONFIGURED BS21 (V2.0) RACK

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

175

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Configuring BS30 V1.2


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure BS30 V1.2 site


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC rack is
configured and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure BS30, perform the following steps:
1. For initial site configurations refer to Configuring Site, the
only difference is that the site type selected is BS30 (V1.2).
2. Right-click Site device config, and click Create Site
rack in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 209.
FIGURE 209 CONFIGURING BS30 V1.2

3. Right-click in rack no. 1 shelf no. 3, and click Create


shelf in the pop-up menu to configure BS30V12 main shelf,
as shown in Figure 210.
4. Right-click on slot no. 1 in BS30 main shelf and then click
Create panel in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 210.
5. Click OK in Create panel dialog box to configure DPM panel.
6. Configure TRM in slot no. 2 of common shelf. For more
information, refer to Configuring TRM.
7. Configure CMM in slot no. 3 of common shelf. For more
information, refer to Configuring CMM Panel.

176

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

FIGURE 210 CONFIGURING BS30 M AIN SHELF

8. Configure shelf 2 and 3 as BS30 V1.2 extended shelf


configure DPM and TRM in slot no. 1 and 2 of BS30 V1.2
extended shelf.
END OF STEPS
Result

BS30 V1.2 is configured successfully, as shown in Figure 211.


FIGURE 211 CONFIGURED BS30 (V1.2)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

177

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Configuring BS30
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure BS30 site


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC rack is
configured and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure BS30 perform the following steps:
1. For initial site configuration, refer to Configuring Site, the
only difference is that the site type selected is BS30.
2. Right-click on Site device config and then, select Create
Site rack in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 212.
FIGURE 212 CONFIGURING BS30

3. Right-click in BS30 rack as shown in Figure 213, and click


Create shelf in the pop-up menu.
FIGURE 213 CONFIGURING BS30 SHELF

4. Right-click slot no. 1, and click Create panel in the pop-up


menu as shown in Figure 214.
FIGURE 214 CONFIGURING BS30 P ANELS

5. Configure CDU 10M in slot no. 1. For more information on


CDU panel configuration, refer to Configuring CDU Panel.

178

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

6. Configure TRM in slot no. 2. For more information on TRM


panel configuration, refer to Configuring TRM.
7. Configure CMM panel in slot no. 3. For more information on
CMM panel configuration, refer to Configuring CMM Panel.
END OF STEPS
Result

BS30 rack is configured successfully as shown in Figure 215.


FIGURE 215 CONFIGURED BS30 RACK

Configuring BS21
Purpose
Prerequisites

Steps

To configure BS21 site


Prior to performing this task, make sure that NetNumenM32
client is running normally and BSC rack is configured
successfully.
To configure BS21, perform the following steps:
1. For initial rack configuration, refer to Configuring Site. The
only difference is the Site Type selected in Create Site
dialog box.
2. Right-click on Site device config and then, click Create
Site rack in the pop-up menu. Click OK, in Create site
rack dialog-box.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

179

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

3. Right-click in BS21 Shelf and then, click Create Shelf in


the pop-up menu. User needs to configure shelf no. 3 only;
shelf no. 2 and shelf no. 1 are created by the system by
default.
4. Right-click in shelf no. 3 slot no. 1, and click Create
panel in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 216.
5. Select Panel Type as CDU10M, CDU8M, CEU or RDU
depending on actual configuration. Click OK in Create panel
dialog box to configure CDU panel.
6. Right-click in rack no. 1 shelf no. 3 slot no. 2, and click
Create panel pop-up menu. Select Panel Type as TRM,
TRME or STRU depending on actual configuration.
FIGURE 216 CREATING BS21 PANEL

7. Panel type TRM is considered here as an example. For more


information, refer to Configuring TRM.
8. Right-click in rack no. 1 shelf no. 3 slot no. 3, and
configure CMM panel. For more information on CMM panel,
refer to Configuring CMM Panel.
9. Right-click in rack no. 1 shelf no. 3 slot no. 4 and
configure CMM panel.
10. Right-click in racks no. 1 shelf no. 3 slot no. 5 and
configure TRM panel.
11. Right-click in rack no. 1 shelf no. 3 slot no. 6 and
configure CDU panel.
END OF STEPS
Result

180

BS21 is configured successfully as shown in Figure 217.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

FIGURE 217 CONFIGURED BS21 RACK

Configuring OB06
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure OB06 site


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
successfully and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure OB06, perform the following steps:
1. For initial configuration refer to Configuring Site, the only
difference is that the Site Type selected is OB06.
2. Right-click on Site device config and then, select Create
Site rack, as shown in Figure 218.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

181

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 218 CONFIGURING OB 06

3. Click OK as shown in Figure 219


FIGURE 219 CONFIGURING OB06 (CREATING SITE RACK)

4. Double click on Site rack under Site device config as


shown in Figure 220.

182

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

FIGURE 220 CONFIGURING OB06 SITE RACK

5. Right-click OB06 rack view and click Create Shelf as shown


in Figure 221, and click OK in Create Shelf dialog box to
configure OB06 common shelf.
FIGURE 221 CONFIGURING OB06 COMMON SHELF

6. Configure CDU, CEU or RDU in slot no 1 ~ 6 of OB06


common shelf, configuring CDU is considered as example

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

183

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

here for more information on CDU panel configuration refer


to Configuring CDU Panel
7. Configure TRM, STRU or TRME in slot no 1 ~ 6 of OB06
radio shelf, configuring TRM is considered as example here
for more information on co9nfiguring TRM refer to
Configuring TRM.
8. Configure CMM in slot no 7 ~ 8 of OB06 radio shelf for
more information on CMM Panel configuration refer to
Configuring CMM Panel.
END OF STEPS
Result

OB06 site is successfully configured, as shown in Figure 222.


FIGURE 222 CONFIGURED OB06 SITE

184

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

Configuring Site by Template


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure site by template


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC rack is
configured and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure site by template, perform the following steps:
B8018 S333 is considered as an example, in the following
configuration.
1. Right-click on Site Config and then, click Create Create
site by template in the pop-up menu, as shown in Figure
223.
FIGURE 223 CREATING SITE BY TEMPLATE

2. Input Site ID, and select Template Type, depending on


actual configuration S333 is taken as an example, as shown
in Figure 224.
FIGURE 224 CONFIGURING SITE BY TEMPLATE

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

185

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

3. Click Cmm Config, and configure CMM panel as shown in


Figure 225.For
CMM
panel
configuration,
refer
to
Configuring CMM Panel.
FIGURE 225 CONFIGURING SITE BY TEMPLATE (CMM CONFIGURATION)

4. Click Radio Config, as shown in Figure 226 and configure


input parameters in dialog box, click Add in to allocate
ARFCN to ARFCN List. Table 57 gives a detail of the
parameters.

186

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

FIGURE 226 CONFIGURING SITE BY TEMPLATE (R ADIO CONFIGURATION)

5. Configure cell 1 ~ 3, and click OK in Create Site by


Template dialog box.
6. Upon successful configuration, system displays confirmation
message as shown in Figure 227. Click OK to complete the
configuration.
FIGURE 227 NOTIFICATION MESSAGE

Note: B8018 S333, B8112 S222, and BS20 S444 supports


site rack by template presently, B8018 S333 is considered as an
example. Configuration of B8112 and BS20 is similar to B8018
the only difference is that user needs to select required
Template Type for configuration.
END OF STEPS
Result

B8018 site configured successfully as shown in Figure 228.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

187

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 228 CONFIGURED B8018 SITE

Deleting Site
Purpose
Prerequisites
Step

To delete a site
Prior to performing this task make sure that NetNumenM32
client is running normally.
To delete a site, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click configured site for example BS30 and click delete
in the pop-up menu.
FIGURE 229 DELETING SITE

2. A confirmation message for the deletion of site appears; click


Yes as shown in Figure 230.

188

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 6 - Site Configuration

FIGURE 230 DELETING SITE CONFIRMATION MESSAGE

Note: User can follow similar procedure for deleting other


nodes such as Cell and TRX. Deleting site is considered as an
example here.
END OF STEPS
Result

Site is deleted successfully.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

189

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

This page is intentionally blank.

190

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter

Inventory Unit and IP


Configuration
This chapter consists of the following topics:

Configuring IP

Configuring Inventory Unit

Configuring IP
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure IP
Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 is running successfully.
To configure IP, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click IP related config Create Interface as
shown in Figure 231.
FIGURE 231 CONFIGURING IP

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

191

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Note: Make sure that MNIC board is configured in BSC rack


before configuring IP.
Generally, both SMP and RPU are not configured, only SMP is
enough. RPU is only configured when the port is loopback, at
that time SMP is not needed.
2. Select Board function type as MNIC, and click Next as
shown in Figure 232.
FIGURE 232 CONFIGURING IP (SELECT INTERFACE INFORM ATION)

3. Input User label and parameter information in Create


Interface as shown in Figure 233, by referring to Table 55.
FIGURE 233 CONFIGURING IP (CREATE INTERFACE)

192

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 7 - Inventory Unit and IP Configuration

TABLE 55 CREATE INTERFACE P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Characters or number or
combination of both: 1~40

Port Number

Integer type: 1~4, default


value: 1

MAC
address

Hexadecimal format

IP number
at port

Integer type: 1~4, default


value: 1

Description

MAC-48 and EUI-48


addresses are
usually shown in
hexadecimal
format, with each
octet separated by a
dash or colon. An
example of a MAC48 address would
be "00-08-74-4C7F-1D"

END OF STEPS
Result

Interface is configured successfully as shown in Figure 234.


FIGURE 234 CONFIGURED INTERFACE

Note: Perform the same process for RPU and SMP, the only
difference is the board function type selected is RPU and SMP.

After successful configuration, all nodes are located under


Interface config as shown in Figure 235.
FIGURE 235 CONFIGURED INTERFACE

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

193

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Configuring Inventory Unit


Purpose
Prerequisites

Steps

To configure inventory unit information


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
successfully and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure inventory unit, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on Inventory unit config and then, click Create
Inventory unit, as shown in Figure 236.
FIGURE 236 SELECTING INVENTORY UNIT CONFIGURATION

2. Configure inventory unit parameters as shown in Figure 237,


by referring to Table 56.

194

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 7 - Inventory Unit and IP Configuration

FIGURE 237 CREATE INVENTORY UNIT

TABLE 56 INVENTORY UNIT P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type

Inventory unit ID

Integer type

Inventory unit type

Character string

Vendor unit family


type

Character string

Vendor name

Character string

Serial number

Integer type and character string


combination of both

Date of
manufacturing

Integer type

Date of last service

Integer type

Unit position

Characters or numbers or combination


of both

Manufacture specific
data

Characters or numbers or combination


of both

Date of create

Integer type

Date of last update

Integer type

Status

Select Status from drop-down list


depending on actual situation.

END OF STEPS
Result

Inventory unit configured successfully.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

195

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

This page is intentionally balnk.

196

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter

Cell Configuration
This chapter consists of the following sections:

Cell Parameters Configuration and Modification

UTRAN Cell Parameters Configuration and Modification

External Cell Configuration

Cell Parameters
Configuration and
Modification
This section consists of the following topics:

Configuring Cell

Configuring Cell GPRS Parameters

Configuring Cell EDGE Parameters

Configuring BCCH TRX

Configuring Non-BCCH TRX

Configuring Frequency Hopping

Configuring Adjacent Reselection Cell

Configuring Adjacent Handover Cell

Configuring Adjacent Handover and Reselection Cell

Configuring Adjacent Interference Cell

Modifying Cell Power Control Parameters

Modifying Cell Handover Control Parameters

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

197

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Configuring Cell
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure cell
Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure cell, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on Radio resource config and then, click
Create Cell in the pop-up menu as shown in Figure 238.
FIGURE 238 CONFIGURING CELL

2. Create cell dialog box appears as shown in Figure 239.


Input User label and configure basic parameter information
in Create cell dialog box, by referring to Table 57.

198

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 239 CREATE CELL (BASIC P ARAMETERS 1)

TABLE 57 CELL BASIC P ARAMETERS 1

Type and
Range

Parameter

Description

User label

Character string:
1~40

Unique user label given to


every cell

BSC ID

Integer type:
1~255

Unique ID given to BSC

Site ID

1~6

Serial number of this cell

BTS ID

Integer type:
1~6

Unique ID given to BTS

Cell type

Drop down list

Cell type can be selected


depending on actual planning
and configuration

Macro cell

Micro cell

LAC

Umbrella
cell

Macromicro cell
Extended
cell

Drop down list


Range: 1~65535
Default : 1

In order to locate the MS, each


GSM PLMN is divided into many
location areas (LAs) to
determine the MS location. The
location area code identifies
different location areas. LAC is

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

199

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Type and
Range

Parameter

Description
one part of LAI (LAI = MCC +
MNC + LAC).

CI

Integer type

CI is a unique code allocated by


network operators for each cell
in a location area to distinguish
a cell in the GSM PLMN.

Range: 0~65535
Default value: 0
NCC

Drop down list

Network Color Code (NCC) is


one of the composing parts of
Base Station ID Code (BSIC)
(BSIC = NCC + BCC). NCC
enables mobile stations to
distinguish adjacent and
different GSM PLMN cells.
Generally, different adjacent
operator has different NCC.
NCC has three digits and it is
one of the network
identification parameters of the
cell.

Range: 0~7
Default: 0

BCC

Drop down list


Range: 0~7
Default : 0

Frequency
band

BCCH ARFCN

BCC enables mobile stations to


distinguish adjacent cells with
the same BCCH carrier
frequency belonging to the
same GSM PLMN. In addition,
the GSM specifications
recommend defining Training
Sequence Code (TSC) of BCCH
channel of every cell equivalent
to the respective cell BCC.

Drop-down list

GSM 900

EXT 900

DCS 1800

GSM 850

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 1023
Default: 1

Operating frequency band of


cell.
The parameter Frequency band
has 6 selections : GSM900,
EXT900, DCS1800, R-GSM,
PCS1900, GSM850

For frequency band GSM900:


1~124.
For frequency band EXT 900:
0~124, 975~1023
For frequency band DCS1800:
512~885.
For frequency band GSM850:
128~251.

Sub cell used

Frequency
band of sub
cell

200

Drop down list

Yes

No

When Sub cell is


used Frequency
band of sub cell

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Whether sub cell is used or not

Frequency band of the sub cell

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Type and
Range

Parameter

Description

for example GSM


900, DCS 1800.
Common
control channel
combination

Drop down list

ARFCN list

CCCH uses
one physical
channel, not
combined
with SDCCH
CCCH uses
one physical
channel,
combined
with SDCCH
CCCH uses
two physical
channels,
not
combined
with SDCCH
CCCH uses
three
physical
channels,
not
combined
with SDCCH
CCCH uses
four
physical
channels,
not
combined
with SDCCH

Drop down list


ARFCN set, the
value range of
each ARFCN is
the same as
BCCH

GPRS service
supported

Drop down list

Dynamic HR

Not

In each cell, all service


channels share CCCH.
According to the configuration
of the service channel in the
cell and the traffic mode of the
cell, CCCH could be one or
more than one physical
channel, and CCCH could share
the same physical channel with
SDCCH.
The combination mode of the
common control channel in cell
depends on CCCH configuration
parameter and it should be
consistent with the actual
configuration of cell CCH. It
could be observed from this
parameter:

BS_CC_CHANS (Number
of CCCH)
BS_CCCH_SDCCH_COMB
(If combined with
SDCCH)

This parameter is broadcasted


to all MSs in the cell by
message RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE3.

User can click Add and allocate


value selected under spin box,
to ARFCN list as shown in
Figure 239.

Whether the cell supports GPRS


service or not?

Support
GPRS
Support
GPRS

Drop down list

Whether Dynamic HR is

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

201

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Type and
Range

Parameter
support
indication
Use cell
dynamic HR
parameters

CBC supported

Threshold for a
single trx
switched from
FR to HR

Yes

NO

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list


Range: 1~100
Default: 60

Description
supported or not?

If Dynamic HR support
indication is Yes, this
parameter is configurable

Whether supports cell


broadcasting function or not.

Threshold value in percentage


for a TRX, to shift from full rate
speech transmission to half rate
according to the interference

Note: LAC and CI are allocated by the MSC and MCC + MNC
+ LAC + CI is unique.
The frequency band of a cell limits the frequency range of a cell.
For example the frequency range of a cell is 128 ~ 251 if the
frequency band of this cell is GSM 850.

and click on respective tabs for example Basic


3. Click
params 2 to modify respective parameters as shown in
Figure 240.

Note: To configure cell supporting dynamic HR, user need


to enable Dynamic HR support indication in Cell basic
parameter 1.

202

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 240 CREATE CELL (BASIC P ARAMETERS 2)

4. Click OK to configure cell parameters.


The following tables describe cell parameters:

For cell basic parameters 2, refer to Table 58.

TABLE 58 CELL BASIC P ARAMETERS 2

Parameter
TA max

Type and Range


Drop down list
Range: 0 ~ 219
Default: 63

TA allowed

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 219
Default: 63

CCCH load
indication period
(s)

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 255
Default: 2

Description
It represents the
maximum TA
supported by
extended cell. For
non-extended cell,
the value range is
0~63; for extended
cell, the value range
is 0~219.
It represents the
maximum TA granted
to be accessed into
the cell. For nonextended cell, the
value range is 0~63;
for extended cell, the
value range is 0~219.
This parameter
defines the period of
sending of CCCH LOAD
INDICATION message
from BTS to BSC. This

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

203

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
parameter is one of
the BTS configuration
parameters.

Periodical location
updating timer
(360s)

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 255
Default: 10

0: infinite and no
need of location
update;
1: 6 minutes;
2: 12 minutes
and
255: 530 minutes)

CCCH load
indication(RACH)

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 100
Default: 80

CCCH load
indication
(PAGCH)

The parameter
regards the threshold
for sending CCCH
LOAD IND.

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 100
Default: 80

NCC Permitted
NCC permitted

204

It is NCC value
collection. Add or
Delete NCC within
the value range in the
NCC permitted pane
on the right of Basic
Parameters 2
interface.

For cell basic parameters 3 click Basic Params 3 as shown


in Figure 241, to configure these parameters refer to Table
59.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 241 BASIC P AR AMETERS 3, INTERFACE

TABLE 59 CELL BASIC P ARAMETERS 3

Parameter

Type and Range

Average burst count


surveyed by RACH

Integer type: 0 ~ 100,

Overload sending period

default value: 60
Integer type: 1 ~ 63,
default value: 2

BA Show ( BCCH Balnd)

Integer type: 0 ~ 1,
Default: 1

MIN received signal level to


access

Integer type: 0 ~ 63,

Max number of
retransmitting event times

Integer type: 0 ~ 3,

Interval of SDCCH re-sending


physical information message

Integer type: 1 ~ 67,

Interval of TCH re-sending


physical information message

Integer type: 1 ~ 32,

Control channel maximum


power level

Integer type: 0 ~ 31,

Number of blocks reserved


for AGCH

Integer type: 0~12,

Number of multiframe of the


PCH

Integer type: 0 ~ 9,

Number of slot to spread

Integer type: 0 ~ 15,

default value: 10
default value: 2
default value: 28
default value: 10
default value: 5
default value: 2
default value: 3

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

205

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

transmission

default value: 14

Lapdm timer for controlling


sddch channel

Integer type: 1~ 7,

Lapdm timer for controlling l


facch/ full rate channel

Integer type: 1~ 7,

Lapdm timer for controlling


facch/ half rate channel

Integer type: 1 ~ 7,

Lapdm timer for controlling


sacch with tch sapi0 channel

Integer type: 1 ~ 7,

Lapdm timer for controlling


sacch with sdcch channel

Integer type: 1 ~ 7,

Lapdm timer for controlling


sdcch with sapi3 channel

Integer type: 1 ~ 7,

Lapdm timer for controlling


sacch with tch sapi 3
channel

Integer type: 1 ~ 7,

default value: 1
default value: 1
default value: 1
default value: 2
default value: 2
default value: 1
default value : 2

For optional parameters, click Optional Params and an


interface appears as shown in Figure 242. For configuring
these parameters, refer to Table 60.
FIGURE 242 OPTIONAL P ARAMETERS INTERFACE

206

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

TABLE 60 OPTIONAL P ARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

IMSI
attach/detach
allowed

Drop down list

IMSI attach/detach
allowed determines
whether cell allows
IMSI Attach/Detach
procedure. IMSI
detach occur when
MS reports switch-off
or when the SIM card
is taken out from the
MS.

Cell bar access

Call reestablishment
allowed

Downlink
discontinuous
transmission
allowed

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

PLMN carriers can


determine whether to
allow MS to access a
specific cell (for
example the cell in
test or the cell for
absorbing traffic
only).
For the call drop
caused by radio link
failure resulted from
burst interference or
high building, MS
could originate call
re-establishment
process to restore the
call. However, the
network determines
whether to allow
reestablishment by
enabling Call reestablishment
allowed.
DTX mode is an
optional downlink
feature of GSM
System for saving the
radio resources.
Discontinuous
transmission (DTX)
refers to the process
where the system
does not transmit
signals from BTS to
MS in IDLE state. This
parameter
participates in
determining to use
DTX mode in
downlink direction.

Emergency call
allowed

Drop down list

Yes

Generally, a valid SIM


card is required for
any MS in GSM
Network to get

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

207

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Cell bar qualify

Access control

208

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

User can click Add to


add the value in spin
box to Access control.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Description
various network
services. But the
operators could
decide whether to
allow MS emergency
call service for the MS
whose access level is
disabled by current
cell, for example the
police station. Select
Yes for Emergency
call allowed to enable
this function.
This parameter
preferably selects
certain cells in the
cell selection process
according to capacity,
traffic and functional
difference in
overlapping areas.
Network broadcasts
the parameter
information to all MSs
in the cell through
RIL3_RR SYSTEM
INFORMATION TYPE3
and TYPE4 messages.
It is one of the cell
selection parameters.
The validity of this
parameter depends
on Cell reselection
parameter
indication.
All MSs in GSM
system have an
access class (15
classes in total). The
MSs that are in the
class ranging between
0 and 9 are common
ones. The MSs that
are in the class
ranging between 11
and 15 are special
MSs (no access class
10). Therefore, the
system can disable
the MSs with certain
access classes to
access the cell (for
example during the
installation and
commissioning or the
congestion control).

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
This information can
reach MS inside the
cell in RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION
TYPE1, 2, 2bis, 3
and 4 messages
through Access
control.

For cell selection parameters, click Cell Selection Paramas


as shown in Figure 243. To configure these parameters, refer
to Table 61.
FIGURE 243 CELL SELECTION P AR AMETERS INTERFACE

TABLE 61 CELL SELECTION P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Cell Selection
Additional
reselection
parameter
indication

Drop down list

Yes

No

The cell selection and


reselection of MS
depends on the C1 and
C2 parameters,
according to the
definition in the GSM
specification. Network
carriers decide whether
to use C2 as the cell
reselection parameter.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

209

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
Additional reselection
parameter indication is
to notify MS whether C2
criterion is adoptable
during the cell
reselection.

Cell reselection
parameter
indication

Cell reselection
offset (2db)

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 63,
Default value: 0

Temporary offset
(10db)

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 7,
Default value: 1

Penalty time
(20s)

Drop down list


Range:0 ~ 31,
Default value: 0

Cell reselecting
hysteresis level

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 7,
Default value: 4

Early category
class mark

210

Drop down list

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Cell reselection
parameter indication
notifies the MS whether
to use C2 as the cell
reselection parameter
and if there is the
related parameter for
calculating C2.
The cell reselection due
to radio channel quality
takes C2 as the
standard. C2 is formed
according to C1
parameter, and some
special offset
parameters, to add the
special influence as to
enable MS to enter
some cells in priority.
Usually, such measures
allow balancing the
traffic on the network.
Temporary offset is one
of the cell selection
parameters. The validity
of the parameter
depends upon Cell
reselection parameter
indication.
Penalty time is one of
the cell selection
parameters. The validity
of this parameter
depends on Cell
reselection parameter
indication.
During the fast moving
MS, LU (Location
update) interval is more
than cell reselection
interval. This affects call
success rate, due to
unreachable paging
response to calling
party. Cell reselecting
hysterses level
minimizes such impacts.
According to GSM
specification, MS

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter
sending control

Type and Range

Yes

No

Description
transmits appended
class mark information
(Class mark 3) to the
network through the
CLASSMARK CHANGE
message as soon as
possible.
This parameter
determines whether the
network supports ECSC
function. Network
broadcasts the
parameter information
to MSs in the cell
through RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION
TYPE3 message.

New set up cause


indication (NECI)

Drop down list

Yes

No

The network operators


decide whether the
network support half
rate service. The new
setup reason denotes
the NECI to notify MS if
the area supports the
half rate service. The
parameter notifies MS
through the RIL3_RR
SYSTEM INFORMATION
TYPE3 and TYPE4
messages. NECI is one
of networks functional
parameters.

MS Power Offset
Power offset
indication

Power offset
(2db)

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 3,
Default: 0

This parameter decides


whether to add offset
value for Control
channel MAX power
level parameter while
sending access request
message on RACH for
Class 3 MS of GSM1800.
According to the GSM
specification, for Class 3
MS of GSM 1800, the
transmission power for
sending access request
message on RACH is to
the value of Control
channel MAX power
level plus a modified
value. Power offset
specifies the modified
value. It determines if
this parameter is valid.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

211

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

For cell system parameters, click System Params and an


interface appears as shown in Figure 244. To configure these
parameters, refer to Table 62.
FIGURE 244 SYSTEM P ARAMETERS INTERFACE

TABLE 62 SYSTEM P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Interference Averaging Period

Interference
averaging period

Drop down list


Range: 1~31,
Default value: 31

The number of
interference-level
SACCH multi frame in
the idle time slots,
that is, the
measurement period
(in the unit of 102
TDMA frames)

Interference Band Boundary

212

Interference band
boundary0

Integer type:0~63
default value: 0

Interference band
boundary1

Integer type: 0~63,


default value: 10

Interference band
boundary2

Integer type: 0~63,


default value: 15

Interference band

Integer type: 0~63,

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

The interface
boundaries are used
to help the conversion
of the interference
level (average) value
into corresponding
interference band
information.
Altogether six

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

boundary3

default value: 20

Interference band
boundary4

Integer type: 0 ~ 63

Interference band
boundary5

Integer type: 0~63

default value : 25
Default value: 63

Description
boundaries determine
five interference
bands. In fact, it is
unnecessary to set
interference boundary
0 and interference
boundary 5. One
represents infinity
and the other
represents negative
infinity. This
parameter, describing
the remaining four
boundaries, is one of
the BTS configuration
parameters.
Generally, -85 dBm ~
-115 dBm is used for
interference
boundaries 1 ~ 4.

Radio Link Failure Criteria


Radio Link time
out on MS side

Drop down list


Range: 0~7,
Default value: 0

Radio Link failure


criteria

Drop down list


Range: 1~2,
Default : 1

Radio Link time


out on BSS side

The standard used by


the BTS to judge
radio link failure (1:
Based on the correct
coding rate of the
uplink SACCH; 2:
Based on the
measured value
ofrxLev/rxqual

Drop down list


Range: 1~2,
Default : 1

Receiving level
threshold

Drop down list


Range: 0~63,
Default value: 10

Receiving quality
threshold

Drop down list


Range: 0~7,
Default : 6

Radio Link failure


checking period

The received level


threshold for checking
radio link failure at
the network side
(BTS)
The receiving quality
threshold for checking
radio link failure at
the network side
(BTS)

Drop down list


Range: 0~63,
Default: 63

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

213

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

For AMR Half parameters, click AMR Half method params


as shown in Figure 245. To configure these parameters, refer
to Table 63.
F I G U R E 2 4 5 AM R H A L F M E T H O D P A R A M E T E R S I N T E R F A C E

TABLE 63 AMR HALF METHOD P AR AMETER

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

AMR Half Active Codec Set


4.75 Kbits/S

5.15 Kbits/S

5.90 Kbits/S

214

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

To select or deselect codec


mode

To select or deselect codec


mode

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

6.70 Kbits/S

7.40 Kbits/S

Type and Range


Drop down list

Yes

No

To select or deselect codec


mode

Drop down list

Yes

No

Description

To select or deselect codec


mode

Others
Initial codec
mode

Drop down list

Start mode

Initial
mode

codec

Start
codec

mode

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 4
Default: 1

Use the coding mode


specified by Start mode

1: Select the coding mode


with lowest bit rate as the
initial coding mode.
2: Select the coding mode
with the second lowest bit
rate, if there is more than
one coding mode.
And soon up to 4th codec
mode

Enable noise
control

Reserved rate
of EMLPP

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 100

Is AMR noise suppression


allowed

This parameter defines the


reserved rate of EMLPP

Default: 20
Use cell EMLPP
threshold

Drop down list

Yes

No

This parameter determines


whether to use EMLPP
reservation.

Threshold of AMR
Method1

Drop down list


Range: 0~63;

Threshold that AMR FR


mode changes

default value: 18

Method2

Drop down list


Range: 0~63;

Threshold that AMR FR


mode changes

default value: 23

Method3

Drop down list


Rage: 0~63;

Threshold that AMR FR


mode changes

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

215

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

default value: 28

Hysteresis of AMR
Method1

Drop down list


Range: 0~15;

Hysteresis that AMR HR


mode changes

Default: 4

Method2

Drop down list


Range: 0~15;

Hysteresis that AMR HR


mode changes

Default: 5

Method3

Drop down list


Range: 0~15;

Hysteresis that AMR HR


mode changes

Default : 5

Note: Maximum four options can be checked under the


section AMR Half Active Codec Set.

For AMR Full method parameters, click AMR Full method


params as shown in Figure 246. To configure these
parameters, refer to Table 64.
F I G U R E 2 4 6 AM R F U L L M E T H O D P A R A M E T E R S

216

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

TABLE 64 AMR FULL METHOD P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

AMR Full Active Codec Set


4.75 Kbits/S

5.15 Kbits/S

5.90 Kbits/S

6.70 Kbits/S

7.40 Kbits/S

7.95 Kbits/S

10.2 Kbits/S

12.2 Kbits/S

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

To select or deselect
codec mode

To select or deselect
codec mode

To select or deselect
codec mode

To select or deselect
codec mode

To select or deselect
codec mode

To select or deselect
codec mode

To select or deselect
codec mode

To select or deselect
codec mode

Others
Initial codec
mode

Start mode

Drop down list

Initial codec mode

Start mode codec

Drop down list


Range: 1~4
Default : 1

Use the coding mode


specified by Startmode

1: Select the coding


mode with lowest bit
rate as the initial
coding mode.
2: Select the coding
mode with the second

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

217

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
lowest bit rate, if there
is more than one
coding mode.
And soon up to 4th
codec mode

Enable noise
control

Drop down list

Yes

No

Is AMR noise
suppression allowed

Threshold of AMR
Method1

Drop down list


Range: 0~63

Threshold that AMR FR


mode changes

Default : 7

Method2

Drop down list


Range: 0~63

Threshold that AMR FR


mode changes

Default : 13

Method3

Drop down list


Range: 0~63

Threshold that AMR FR


mode changes

Default : 23

Hysteresis of AMR
Method1

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 15

Hysteresis that AMR FR


mode changes

Default : 4
Method2

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 15

Hysteresis that AMR FR


mode changes

Default : 4
Method3

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 15

Hysteresis that AMR FR


mode changes

Default : 4

218

For Cell Optional Parameters, click Cell optional params


and interface as shown in Figure 247 appears. To configure
these parameters, refer to Table 65.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 247 CELL OPTIONAL P AR AMETERS INTERFACE

TABLE 65 CELL OPTIONAL P AR AMETERS

Parameter
Protection period
for access attempt

Type and Range


Drop down list
Range: 0 ~ 255
Default : 10

Multi band report


indication

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 3
Default : 3

Description
This parameter provides
MS to wait for a certain
time for attempting a new
call, after getting
IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT
REJECT message from
BSC.
Multi band report indication
is used to notify MS to
report contents of adjacent
cells in multiple frequency
bands. It is one of the
system control
parameters.
The setting of this
parameter is subject to
traffic in each frequency
band. General principles to
set the parameters are as
follows:

0: If the traffic of each


frequency
band
is
almost equivalent, and
the operator has no
choice
over
the
frequency band
3: If the traffic of each
frequency band is quite
different,
and
the
operator hopes that MS
enters
a
specific
frequency band with
priority.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

219

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Description

Type and Range

1 or 2: For other cases

Uplink
discontinuous
transmission

Drop down list

0: MS could use

Range: 0 ~ 3

DTX

Default : 1

1: MS should use DTX


2: MS should not use
DTX
3: Reserved

For Cell Other Parameters, click Other params and interface


as shown in Figure 248 appears. To configure these
parameters, refer to Table 66.
FIGURE 248 CELL OTHERS P AR AMETERS

TABLE 66 CELL OTHER PARAMETERS

Parameter

220

Type and Range

RACH receiving
signal
threshold for
busy burst

Drop down list

Preprocessing
indication

Drop down list

Range: 0 ~ 63
Default : 63

Range: 0 ~ 4

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Description
If the value is exceeded (that
is less than RACH Receiving
signal level threshold for busy
burst dBm), system considers
that as a busy RACH.
Preprocess of the survey
report can be transferred to
BTS to reduce the burden of

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range


Default : 3

Description
Abis interface link. The values
are as follows:

0: Do not use preprocess


1: Use preprocess; the
average reporting period is
two SACCH multi-frames
2: Use preprocess; the
average reporting period is
two SACCH multi-frames
3: Use preprocess; the
average reporting period is
three SACCH multi-frames
4: Use preprocess; the
average reporting period is
four SACCH multi-frames
Other values: Reserved
Maximum
resending time
for physical
information

Drop down list

Low priority of
channel select
priority

User can select


following from
drop-down list.

Range: 5 ~ 35
Default : 8

No change

Full rate first

High priority of
channel select
priority

Only full
rate allowed
Only half
rate allowed

No change

Full rate first

Specify the channel-rate


selection method of low
priority subscriber.

Half rate
first

User can select


following from
drop-down list
depending on
actual
configuration.

MAX resending times for


physical information decides
maximum number of
resending times for RIL3_RR
PHYSICAL INFORMATION
message. This is one of the
BTS parameters.

Specify the channel rate


selection method of high
priority subscriber

Half rate
first
Only full

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

221

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

rate allowed

Only half
rate
allowed,

Cell Support Encryption Mode


Non cipher
mode
supported

Cipher mode
supported A5/1

Cipher mode
supported A5/2

Cipher mode
supported A5/3

Cipher mode
supported A5/4

Cipher mode
supported A5/5

Cipher mode
supported A5/6

Cipher mode
supported A5/7

222

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Cell Support Encryption


Mode is the encryption mode
supported by BTS. The
required encryption algorithm
is contained in BSSAP CIPHER
MODE COMMAND or BSSAP
ASSIGNMENT REQUEST or
BSSAP HANDOVER COMMAND
message sent by the MSC
side. By checking this
parameter, BSC can learn
whether the cell supports this
required encryption algorithm
to give a proper response.
Currently, not all GSM
networks employ encryption.

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

For service process additional parameters, click on Service


process additional params and an interface as shown in
Figure 249 appears. To configure these parameters, refer to
Table 67.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 249 SERVICE PROCESS AND AD DITIONAL P ARAMETERS


INTERFACE

TABLE 67 SERVICE PROCESS ADDITIONAL P AR AMETERS

Parameter
Directed retry
indication

Type and Range


Drop down list

Yes

No

Description
Network assigns
corresponding service
channel for MS in an
adjacent cell, if there is no
service channel available in
serving cell.
Directed retry indication
defines a special handover
process that can reduce the
call drop ratio. Directed
retry falls into intra-BSC
directed retry and interBSC directed retry. The
former one does not need
the participation of MSC,
while the latter one does.

Queue allowed
when assigned

Queue allowed
when handover

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

This parameter decides


whether to allow queuing in
assignment process. Cell
improves the call drop rate
with the use of such
techniques.
This parameter decides
whether queuing can be
performed during a
handover process and
when there are no
available channels in the

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

223

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
cell

Preemption
allowed when
assigned

Preemption
allowed when
handover

When assigned
forced handover

When handover
forced handover

No of candidate
cell for handover

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 16
Default : 6

Fast average
indication

224

Drop down list

Yes

No

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

It decides whether forced


disconnection is allowed
during the assignment.

It decides whether forced


disconnection is allowed
during the handover.

This parameter indicates


whether the low priority
subscribers can be
forcefully handover to
other cell, so that high
priority subscribers can
obtain channels. This
parameter represents
whether forced handover is
allowed during assignment.
This parameter indicates
whether the low priority
subscribers can be
forcefully handover to
other cell, so that high
priority subscribers can
obtain channels. This
parameter represents
whether forced handover is
allowed during handover.
This parameter decides
maximum number of
candidate cells for
handover that can be
contained in BSSAP
HANDOVER REQUIRED
message from BSC to MSC.
Network may not perform
handover or power control
if less measurement data is
available during call
process. The average
calculating process for
these processes is enabled
only when the measured
data reaches a certain
window size. Common
average process does not
take place, for the five
measured values BSC
receives. BSC directly
calculates the average of
the 5 measured values if
the fast average process is

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
adopted.

Allowed FACCH
call set up after
emergency call

Allowed FACCH
call set up when
page respond.

Allowed call set up


on FACCH

Allowed call re
established on
FACCH

BCCH switch
allowed

SDCCH dynamic
configuration
allowed

Minimal resource
threshold

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

BSC can allocate the


suitable TCH channel when
an MS attempts to access
the network, and there is
no SDCCH available in the
cell. That is the so-called
FACCH call establishment.
BSC can allocate the
suitable TCH channel when
an MS attempts to access
the network, and there is
no SDCCH available in the
cell. That is the so-called
FACCH call establishment.
Whether to allow call setup
on FACCH

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 100
Default : 100

This parameter decides


whether the cell allows
BCCH switch.

This parameter decides


whether the cell allows
SDCCH dynamic
configuration.
The minimum resource
threshold (%) allowed for
the cell

END OF STEPS
Result

The cell is successfully configured.

Configuring Cell GPRS Parameters


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure GPRS parameters


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC rack is
configured.
To configure cell-supporting GPRS, perform the following steps:

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

225

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

1. Click GPRS basic params in Create Cell interface, as


shown in Figure 250 and input the parameter information by
referring Table 68.
Note: GPRS parameters only appear if the user selects the
Support GPRS in GPRS service supported parameter during
the creating cell.
FIGURE 250 GPRS BASIC P AR AMETERS

TABLE 68 GPRS BASIC PAR AMETERS

Parameter
NSEI

Type and Range


Drop down list
Range: 0 ~ 65535

BVCI

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 65535
Default: 21

226

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Description
In GPRS protocol stack,
every unique BSSGP
Virtual Connection
(BVC) that is
NSEI+BVCI for each
GPRS cell belongs to
Network Service Entity
(NSE). NSEI uniquely
identifies every NSE.
ZXG10 iBSC supports
several NSEs for future
expandability option.
The peer-to-peer Pointto-Point (PTP) or Pointto-Multipoint (PTM) or
inter-signaling entity
transmission of BSSGP
PDUs lies on BVC. BVCI
identifies each virtual
connection. BVCI
enables the network

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
service layer to route
BSSGP PDUs to the
peer entity. One NSE
carries only one
signaling BVC
(BVCI=0).

RAC

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 65535
Default: 44

UPU unit

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 2000

DSP No

Integer type: 9 ~ 22
Default value: 10

RAC is a part of
Routing Area Identity
(RAI). RAI defines the
GPRS serving cell
identification. GPRS
system divides the
Location Area (LA) to
several routing areas
(RAs) using RAI
(MCC+MNC+LAC+RAC).
Routing Area (RA)
distribution is similar to
GSM system using the
location area to manage
a group of cells.
It is corresponding with
the board position in
physical configuration
Value Range depends
on DSP number in
physical configuration.

Note: To configure cell parameters, user needs to click on


the respective parameter tab and configure the parameters.
2. Click OK, to configure GPRS parameters.
For GPRS parameters, refer to the following tables.

For GPRS power control parameters, click on GPRS power


control and an interface as shown in Figure 251 appears. To
configure these parameters, refer to Table 69.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

227

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 251 GPRS POWER CONTROL PAR AMETERS INTERFACE

TABLE 69 GPRS POWER CONTROL P ARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Filter Period Of Power


Filter period in
the packet idle
mode

Drop down list

Filter period in
packet
transmission
mode

Drop down list

Range: 0 ~ 31
Default value : 0

Range: 0 ~ 31
Default value : 0

This parameter belongs to


global power control and GPRS
power control, and is used at
MS side. System broadcasts to
MS through PSI1, PSI13 and
SI13 messages. This
parameter indicates the filter
period of the signal intensity
for power control in the packet
idle mode.
This parameter indicates the
filter period of the signal
intensity for power control in
the packet transmission mode.

Power Control Parameters


PS14 sending
mark

Drop down list

Yes

No

Default: Yes
Power control
measurement
channel

Drop down list

BCCH

PDCH

This parameter indicates whether to


broadcast the optional PSI4
message. This message contains a
list of channels that interferes with
the survey.
This parameter indicates the
position where the downlink
power strength is surveyed for
uplink power control.

Default: BCCH
Power control
parameters

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 10
Default value : 0

Filter constant

228

Drop down list

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This parameter determines the MS


transmission power control Alpha
().
This parameter is a filter

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

of power
control

Range: 0 ~ 15

Power
decreasing
descending on
PBCCH

Fixed value

Default value : 0

Description
constant used to optimize the
interference signal intensity in
power control.

Not change able

For GPRS cell reselection parameters, click on Cell


reselection, an interface as shown in Figure 252 appears.
To configure these parameters, refer to Table 70.
FIGURE 252 GPRS CELL RESELECTION P AR AMETERS INTERFACE

TABLE 70 GPRS CELL RESELECTION P ARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Cell Reselection
Cell
reselection
offset

Drop down list

Temporary
offset of
cell

Drop down list

Range: 0 ~ 31
Default value : 0

MS uses this parameter for cell


reselection in IDLE state. BCCH
channel of adjacent cells
broadcast the parameter
information in PSI3 message.
Cell reselection in GPRS system
follows C32 standard.
MS uses this parameter for cell
reselection. BCCH channel of
adjacent cells broadcast the

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

229

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter
reselection

Type and Range

10

20

30

40

50

60

Infinite

Penalty
time of cell
resection

Drop down list

Interval of
reselecting
same cell

Drop down list

parameter information in PSI3


message. In the GPRS system,
the cell reselection adopts C32.
There is a temporary offset in
C32 that provides a negative
offset, similar to C2 in GSM
system. The effective time
depends on Penalty Time
parameter.

This parameter is used at MS


side. Network broadcasts the
parameter information to MS
through PSI3 message. Network
prevents MS to reselect this cell
within Interval of reselecting
the same cell period, when MS
performs a cell reselection and
do not releases as normal,
unless there is no other cell for
selection.

Range: 0 ~ 31
Default value : 0

10

15

20

30

60

120

300

Description

This parameter is used at MS


side. Network broadcasts the
parameter information to an MS
through PSI3 message of local
and neighboring cells. It
indicates the threshold value of
HCS signal intensity in the cell.

Others
Random
access
attempt
permitted

Usage of
cell
reselection
offset
GPRS
access
minimum
signal level

230

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 63
Default value : 12

Random access attempt


permitted is used to indicate
whether MS is allowed to
attempt to access another cell
(if it exists). If abnormal release
occurs during the packet
transmission, MS discards all
running TBFs.
This parameter determines
whether to use the exceptional
rule when adopting ReselOff.
The minimum received level for
allowing the MS to access the
GPRS system
(GPRS_RxLev_ACCESS_MIN)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter
Priority
threshold

HCS exist

Type and Range


Drop down list

12

18

24

30

36

Infinite

Drop down list

Yes

No

GPRS
maximum
initial
access
signal level

Drop down list

LSA ID

Drop down list

Range: 0 ~ 31
Default value : 5

Range:0 ~
16777215
LSA offset

Description

System broadcasts the


parameter information to MS
through SI4, SI6 and SI7
messages. This parameter
relates to GPRS access
minimal signal level in
calculation of C4 standard.

This parameter is used at MS


side. This is a parameter of
Hierarchical Cell Structure
(HCS), and system broadcasts
to MS through the PSI3
message. This parameter
indicates whether the HCS
parameters (PriorityClass and
HCSTHr) exist in the cell.
MS uses this parameter for cell
selection and reselection
involving calculation of C1 and
C2 values. MS near the BTS
may interfere with the
neighboring channels if the
parameter is set to a large
value. MS at the cell boundary
will have low access success
rate if the parameter value is
too small. Generally, it is
recommended to set this
parameter as 5 (for GSM900MS)
and 2 (for GSM1800MS).
LSA identification (the 24 least
significant bits are effective)

Drop down list

16

24

32

48

System broadcasts the


parameter information to MS
through SI4, SI6 and SI7
messages. This parameter
defines the offset value for LSA
reselection between two cells
with the same LSA priority.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

231

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

64
HCS

Threshold
of HCS
signal level

Drop down list

HCS
priority

Drop down list

Range: 0 ~ 31
Default value : 0

Range: 0 ~ 7
Default value : 0

This parameter is used at MS


side. Network broadcasts the
parameter information to an MS
through PSI3 message of local
and neighboring cells. It
indicates the threshold value of
HCS signal intensity in the cell.
The network broadcasts to MS
through PSI3 message. This
parameter specifies the HCS
priority of the cell.

Reselection Hysteresis
C31
hysteresis

GPRS cell
reselection
hysteresis

Routing
reselection
hysteresis

232

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

10

12

14

Drop down list

10

12

14

This parameter is used at MS side.


Network broadcasts to MS through
the PSI3 message. This parameter
determines whether to use the
GPRS cell reselection hysteresis
parameter in C31 standard
MS will activate the cell
reselection according to this
parameter only when the signal
level of adjacent cell (whose
location zone is different from
that of local cell) is greater than
that of local cell, and meanwhile
the value difference must be
greater than that required by
the parameter.

This parameter specifies extra


hysteresis value used in selecting a
cell in another routing area when MS
is in IDLE or BUSY mode. It is not
necessary to broadcast this
parameter through the PSI3
message when the value of this
parameter is the same as that of
GPRS cell reselection hysteresis.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Note: To minimize the influence of this issue, the GSM


specifications put forward a parameter called cell selection
hysteresis (CSH), which requires that the signal level of adjacent
cell (in a different location area) should be larger than the local
cell signal level, and their difference should be larger than the
value specified by the cell selection hysteresis.

For GPRS channel parameters, click GPRS channel and an


interface as shown in Figure 253 appears. To configure these
parameters, refer to Table 71.
FIGURE 253 GPRS CELL CHANNEL P ARAMETERS INTERFACE

TABLE 71 GPRS CHANNEL P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Control Channel Parameters


PAGCH
reserved
block

Drop down list

PBCCH
reserved
block

Drop down list

Range: 0 ~ 12
Default value : 0

This parameter indicates the


number of blocks in a 52frame multi frame that allow
neither packet paging nor
PBCCH. Only PAGCH, PDTCH
and PACCH can appear on
these blocks.
This parameter belongs to
PCCCH structure and is used
at MS side. System
broadcasts to MS through
PSI1 message. This
parameter indicates the
number of blocks assigned as
PBCCH in a 52-frame multi

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

233

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
frame (altogether 12 blocks).

PRACH
reserved
block

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 12
Default value : 2

This parameter indicates the


number of fixed blocks
reserved for the PRACH
channel in the PDCH channel
that bears PCCCH. These
blocks must be identified
with USF = FREE. MS can use
this parameter or USF =
FREE to carry out the PRACH
assignment.

PRACH Control Parameters


Interval range
of packet
access
attempt

Drop down list


Range: 2, 3, 4, 5, 6,
7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14,
16, 20, 25, 32, 50
Default: 4

Interval
period of
packet access
attempt

Drop down list


Range:12, 15, 20,
30, 41, 55, 76, 109,
163, 217
Default: 20

If MS does not get any


response for the previous
channel request message, it
can resend a channel request
message after waiting for a
random period. Interval
range of packet access
attempt is used to
determine the time length of
random waiting.
If MS does not get any
response for the previous
channel request message, it
can resend a channel request
message after waiting for a
random period. Interval
period of packet access
attempt is used to
determine the time length of
random waiting.

Maximum Time of Attempt


Priority1

Drop down list


Range : 1, 2, 4, 7
Default: 4

Priority2

Drop down list


Range : 1, 2, 4, 7
Default: 4

Priority3

Drop down list


Range : 1, 2, 4, 7
Default: 4

Priority4

234

Drop down list

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This parameter belongs to


PRACH control and is used at
MS side. System broadcasts
to MS through PSI1
message. This parameter
indicates maximum attempts
of random access allowed on
PRACH for MS with radio
priorities of 1 ~ 4.
This parameter is an array
with 4 elements. The first
array element corresponds to
maximum number of
attempts allowed for radio
priority 1.

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Range : 1, 2, 4, 7
Default: 4

Access Persist Level

Priority1

Drop down list


Range : 0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
10, 11, 12, 13,
14, 15, 16
Default: 0

Priority2

Drop down list


Range : 0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10,
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
16
Default: 0

Priority3

Drop down list


Range : 0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10,
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
16
Default: 0

Priority4

Drop down list

This parameter belongs to


PRACH control and is used at
MS side. System broadcasts
to MS through PSI1
message. The network sets a
level threshold P I (I = 1, 2,
3, 4) for MS of various radio
priorities.
For each attempt of packet
access, MS abstracts a
random value R with even
distribution probability from
the set {0, 1 15}. System
allows MS to initiate an
attempt of packet access
only when P I is lower than
or equal to R.
This parameter is an array
with 4 elements. The first
element corresponds to the
access and persisting level of
radio priority 1.

Range : 0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10,
11, 12, 13, 14, 15,
16
Default: 0
Access Control Level

Level 0

Level 1

Level 2

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

All MSs in GSM system have


an access class. Common MS
has the class 0 ~ 9 and
special MS has the class 11 ~
15. Class 10 does not exist.
System can prohibit MS with
some access class to enter
the cell according to this
parameter. System allows
access of a mobile with
access class, N = 0, 1 9,
11 15. It allows emergency
calls when the eleventh digit
= EC.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

235

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter
Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

Level 9

Level 10

Level 11

Level 12

Level 13

Level 14

236

Type and Range


Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Description
If the Nth bit of access
control level is 0 (0
represents access allowed,
1 represents access not
allowed), it will allow the
access of MS with
AccCtrlClass =N (N=0, 1,
9, 11, 15). Bit 11= EC
represent that Emergency
Call is available.
This parameter consists of
two bytes (16 bits).
The first bit: C15, C14, C13,
C12, C11, C10, C9, C8;
The second bit: C7, C6, C5,
C4, C3, C2, C1, C0

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Parameter allows cell


access when Cn is 0,
which indicates that
MS with access class
of N is not forbidden
(N =0,1,, 9, 11,,
15)
Parameter forbids cell
access when Cn is 1,
which indicates that
MS with access class
of N is forbidden (N =
0, 1,, 9, 11,, 15)
C10 is always 0

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Level 15

Type and Range

Yes

No

Description

Drop down list

Yes

No

For GPRS other parameters 1, click GPRS other params 1


and an interface as shown in Figure 254 appears. To
configure these parameters, refer to Table 72.
FIGURE 254 GPRS OTHER P AR AMETERS 1 INTERFACE

TABLE 72 GPRS OTHER PARAMETERS 1

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

System Information on BCCH


Additional
reselect
parameter
indication
SI13 sending
position

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

System notifies MS using


Additional reselect
parameter indictor whether
to use C2 during cell
reselection.
SI13 can be sent on either of
the following:

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

237

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

BCCH Norm

BCCH Ext

Description
BCCH Norm position:
In this case, it occupies the
BCCH block with TC = 4; TC
= ((FN DIV 51) mod (8)).
BCCH Ext position:
In this case, it occupies one
fixed AGCH block with TC = 0

RACOLOR

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 7
Default value : 0

RACOLOR is similar to the


BCC function in the GSM
system. In some cases, such
as inter-BSC cell reselection,
the GPRS network assigns
different RACOLOR values to
adjacent cells with the same
route area code to ensure
that MS can initiate the
Routing Area Updating
process.

System Parameter on BCCH


Minimum
number of
idle CS
channel

Packet access
priority
threshold

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 255
Default value : 2

No package
access

allow priority

allow priority1

allow
priority1-2

Database uses this


parameter on Pn. It indicates
minimum threshold of the
number of IDLE channels
under the CS status, when
the network converts the
switch able channel to the PS
channel.
This parameter is used at MS
side. System broadcasts to
MS through PSI13 and SI13
messages. Packet access
priority threshold indicates
the priority level of MS
packet access allowed in the
cell as similar to the function
of ACCESS CLASS.

allow
priority1-3
allow
priority1-4
PRACH Load Indication

Overload
report period
on PRACH

Drop down list

Link error
counter

Drop down list

Range: 0 ~ 255
Default value : 10
Range: 0 ~ 100
Default value : 20

PRACH
receive signal

238

Drop down list

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

PRACH overload report


period

Initial value of the GPRS link


error timer
If a bursts level exceeds the
value specified by PRACH

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

level
threshold

Range: 0 ~ 63

Average
measuring
burst level on
PRACH

Drop down list

Buffer
threshold on
paging
message

Drop down list

Queue length
threshold on
64 multiframe
paging period

Drop down list

PRACH
overload
threshold
ratio

Drop down list

Default value : 63

Range: 0 ~ 100
Default value : 60

Range: 0 ~ 100

Description
receive signal level threshold,
the burst is considered as a busy
burst.
It indicates the number of
measured bursts on PRACH.
If the receiving signal level of
Average bursts count
surveyed by RACH BPs is
lower than the value of this
parameter, overloading of
PRACH channel occur. The
BTS needs to be
synchronized when modifying
the parameter.
Message buffer threshold of the
pacing channel (PccchIndTh1, %)

Default value : 50

Range: 0 ~ 100
Default value : 50

Range: 0 ~ 100
Default value : 50

Queue length threshold in the 64


multiframe paging period
(PccchIndTh2, %)

If the result exceeds the


threshold, then the overload
can be decided.

Packet System Information Send Speed


Information 0

Information 1

Information 2

Information 3

Information 4

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

This parameter is used for


global process on BRP.
Packet System
Information Send Speed
indicates whether various
types of PSI messages are
sent at high rate. There is
limited packet system
messages (16) sent at high
rate, and the number of sent
messages of each type varies
depending on the length of
the message. Therefore, the
user can only set
approximate requirements
for sending rate of each
system message type.
Before sending the message,
the global process
dynamically specifies the
sending rate of each packet
system-message type
according to the user
requirement and the system

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

239

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter
Information 5

Information 6

Information 7

Information 8

Type and Range


Drop down list

Yes

No

Description
limitation.

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

For GPRS other parameters 2, click GPRS other params 2


and an interface as shown in Figure 255 appears. To
configure these parameters, refer to Table 73.
FIGURE 255 GPRS OTHER P AR AMETERS 2 INTERFACE

TABLE 73 GPRS OTHER PARAMETERS 2

Parameter

240

Type and Range

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Description

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter
Support CCN
mode

Type and Range


Drop down list

Yes

No

Description
Whether supports CCN mode
or not.

Default: No
Cell support
system
message
status flow

Drop down list

Yes

No

Whether supports system


message status flow.

Default: Yes

Allow SOLSA
MS to access

Drop down list

Yes

No

Default: No
CCCH
spilt_pg_cycle
support

Drop down list

Yes

No

Default: Yes

Extended
paging
supported

Drop down list

Yes

No

System broadcasts this


parameter to MS through
SI4, SI6 and SI7
messages. The network uses
Allow SOLSA MS to access
to prevent MS from residing
in the cell.
This parameter indicates whether
to support the SplitPgCycle
function on CCCH.
Split_Pg_Cycle means sending
the PACKET IMMEDIATE
ASSIGNMENT, PACKET
PAGING and PACKET
IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT
REJECT messages on multiple
blocks.
Whether the cell supports the
extended paging mode

Default: Yes
PSI status
supported

Drop down list

Yes

No

Whether the network supports


packets

Default: No
Cell support
extended
uplink TBF

Drop down list

Yes

No

Default: Yes
Extend
dynamic allot
supported

Drop down list

Uplink delay
time

Drop down list

Range: 0 ~ 1

0 represents supported, 1
represents not

Default: 0
Range: 0 ~ 4000

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

241

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Default: 1000
Extend uplink
TBF time

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 3000
Default: 1500

Interval
number of
GPRS TBF
downlinks
RRBP

Drop down list

Interval
number of
EGPRS TBF
downlinks
RRBP

Drop down list

Interval
number of
GPRS TBF
uplinks ACK

Drop down list

Interval
number of
EGPRS TBF
uplinks ACK

Drop down list

Uplink
measure
report period

Drop down list

Calculating
period of
load on
PPCH
PSI1send
period

Range: 3~ 20
Default: 10

Range: 6~ 60
Default: 10

Range: 3~ 20
Default: 10

Range: 3~ 20
Default: 8

Range: 400~ 2000


Default: 800
Drop down list
Range: 0~ 16
Default: 10

Drop down list


Range: 0~ 15
Default: 4

Selective
granularity

UPU syn mark

242

Drop down list


Range: 0~ 1

BRP sets the parameter


value. This parameter
indicates the load calculation
period of PPCH.

This parameter indicates the


sending period and destination of
the PSI1 message in a cell.
PSI1 contains information about
cell reselection, PRACH control,
control channel description, and
possible global power control
parameters. System sends the
message at high repetition rate
as long as PBCCH exists.
0: uplink block allocation
granularity is 1

Default: 0

and

Value: 0 or 1

If UPU is not synchronized, this


parameter is 0. Otherwise it is
1.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

1: uplink block allocation


granularity is 4

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

For GPRS NC survey parameters, click on GPRS NC survey


and an interface as shown in Figure 256 appears. To
configure these parameters, refer to Table 74.
FIGURE 256 GPRS NC SURVEY P AR AMETERS INTERFACE

TABLE 74 GPRS NC SURVEY P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Cell Resection Survey Report Period


Packet idle
mode

Drop down list


Value range: 0.48,
0.96, 1.92, 3.84, 7.68,
15.36, 30.72, 61.44
Default: 61.44

Packet
transmission
mode

Drop down list


Value range: 0.48,
0.96, 1.92, 3.84, 7.68,
15.36, 30.72, 61.44
Default: 3.84

This parameter belongs to


Network Control (NC)
survey and is used at MS
side. This parameter
indicates the period of MS
reporting cell reselection
survey in packet IDLE
mode. When Network
control order is NC0, the
parameter information is
not necessary to broadcast
through PSI5 message.
System uses this
parameter to indicate the
period of MS reporting the
cell reselection survey in
the packet transmission
mode. When Network
control order is NC0, the
parameter information is
not necessary to broadcast
through PSI5 message.

Others
Extended
measurement

Drop down list

Extended measurement
report order is to indicate the

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

243

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter
report order

Type and Range

Yes

No

Description
survey report command of MS
in a cell.

Default: Yes
Network
control order

Drop down list

NC0

NC1

NC2

Default: NC0

NC hold
timer in non
DRX mode

Drop down list


Value range: No nonDRX mode, 0.24, 0.48,
0.72, 0.96, 1.20, 1.44,
1.92
Default: 0.48

Extended
measurement
report order

Drop down list

EM0

EM1

Drop down list

TYPE 1

Type 2

Type 3

Default: Type 1

244

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

NC1: MS controls the


cell reselection and
sends the survey
report.
NC2: The network
controls
the
cell
reselection and the
MS sends the survey
report.

This parameter indicates


the minimal time for an MS
to stay in the non-DRX
mode after sending an NC
survey report.

Default: EM0
Type of
extended
measurement
report

NC0: MS controls the


cell reselection; no
survey report.

EM0: MS performs
no extended survey
EM1: MS must send
the extended survey
report to the network
Type I: This type of
report must be
extended if the
frequency points for
the extended survey
are among the six
strongest carrier
frequencies, even if
the BSIC decoding is
successful. The
report should cover
the receiving signal
level and the
successfully decoded
BSIC (if any).
Type II: This type of
report must be
extended if all the
frequency points for
the extended survey

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

are located in the six


strongest carrier
frequencies, the
BSIC decoding is
successful and the
NCC part is allowed
for survey. The
report should cover
the receiving signal
level and the
successfully decoded
BSIC.

Report period
of extended
measurement

Drop down list


Value range: 60, 120,
240, 480, 960, 1920,
3840, 7680
Default: 1920

Type III: Use this


type to report all the
frequency points for
the extended survey.
No BSIC decoding is
necessary.
The
report should contain
the receiving signal
level. Besides, the
interference of each
carrier
frequency
shall be reported.

This parameter indicates the


interval of the extended survey
report. System sends the
parameter information through
the PSI5 message when
Extended measurement
report order is EM1.

For GPRS cell optional parameters, click GPRS cell options


and an interface as shown in Figure 257 appears. To
configure these parameters, refer to Table 75.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

245

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 257 GPRS CELL OPTIONAL P ARAMETERS

TABLE 75 GPRS CELL OPTIONAL P ARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Timer
T3168,s

Drop down list


Value range:0.5 ~ 4.0
(Step length is 0.5)
Default: 4.0

T3192,ms

Drop down list


Value range: 500, 1000,
1500, 0, 80, 120, 160, 200
Default: 500

T3168 indicates the


maximum time to wait
for PACKET UPLINK
ASSIGNMENT message
after MS sends
PACKET RESOURCE
REQUEST message (or
PACKET DOWNLINK
ACK/NACK message
with Channel Request
Description IE).
The time length for the
MS to wait for the
release of TBF and
start to listen to the
paging channel after
receiving the last data
block

Network Operation Mode


Non DRX
mode holding
time

Drop down list


Value range: No non-DRX
mode, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32,
64
Default: 2

246

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

It indicates the value


of DRX_TIMER_MAX.
When the MS changes
from the packet BUSY
mode to the packet IDLE
mode, it should first enter
the Non-DRX mode.

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
Minimum values of this
parameter and
DRX_TIMER_MAX
parameters determine the
time length for MS to stay
in the Non-DRx mode.

Max blocks
transmission
in each TS

Drop down list

Packet control
acknowledge
type

Drop down list

The maximum number


of blocks
(BS_CV_MAX) that can
be sent in each
timeslot.

Range: 0 ~ 15,
Default : 15

4 access bursts
RLC/MAC
block EM0

control

Default: RLC/MAC control


block EM0
Access burst
type

Drop down list

8 bits

11 bits

Default: 8 bits

It indicates the default


format for MS to send
PACKET CONTROL
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
message.

It indicates whether to
use the 8-bit or 11-bit
access burst in PRACH
and PTCCH/U, and the
PACKET CONTROL
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
message.

Timer N3102
N3102
decrease step

Drop down list


Value range: 4, 8, 12, 16,
20, 24, 28, 32

Decrease step length of


counter N3102

Default: 4
N3102
increase step

Drop down list


Value range: 4, 8, 12, 16,
20, 24, 28, 32

Increase step length of


counter N3102

Default: 8
N3102 MAX

Drop down list


Value range: 4, 8, 12, 16,
20, 24, 28, 32

The maximum value of


counter N3102

Default: 32
GPRS phone init coding
1*16 Kbps

Drop down list

CS1

CS 2

Default: CS 2
2~5*16 Kbps

Drop down list

CS1

CS 2

This parameter indicates


the default-coding mode
for GPRS MS initial
access, under different
Abis interface link
bandwidths. It is a twodimensional array. It
represents the defaultcoding mode
corresponding to GPRS
MS less than 1 16 kbps

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

247

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

CS 3

CS 4

Description
and 2 ~ 5 16 kbps
bandwidth respectively.

Default: CS 2
GPRS phone
initial code
can be
changed

Drop down list

Yes

No

Default: Yes

END OF STEPS
Result

Cell supporting GPRS is successfully configured.

Configuring Cell EDGE Parameters


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure cell with EDGE support


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC rack is
configured and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure EGE parameters, perform the following steps:
1. Click EDGE params, as shown in Figure 258, and configure
parameters by referring Table 76.
Note: If Support EDGE is selected in GPRS service supported
under Cell basic parameter 1, the cell supports EDGE function
and the user needs to configure EDGE parameters.
FIGURE 258 CONFIGURING EDGE P ARAMETERS

248

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

TABLE 76 EDGE P AR AMETERS

Parameter
Support DTM

Type and Range


Drop down list

Yes

No

Default: No

Max no of GTTP
Lapdm frame

Description
It indicates if the
cell supports Dual
Transfer Mode
(DTM), which allows
A class MS to
initialize packet
request flow in
dedicated mode.

Drop down list


Range: 0 ~ 7
Default: 3

Support
EDGE_PACKET_C
HANNEL_REQUES
T access program

Drop down list

Yes

No

Default: No
Support Uplink
LA+IR quality
control

Drop down list

Yes

No

Access procedures
specified cell
support
EGPRS_PACKET_CH
ANNEL_REQUEST
Specified cell
support uplink
"LA+IR" quality
control

Default: No
Take preemptive
trans bit function

Drop down list

Yes

No

To enable or disable
Preemptive trans bit
function.

Default: No
Average filter
period for uplink
BEP

Drop down list

Average filter
period for
downlink BEP

Drop down list

EGPRS phone
quality measure
mode

Drop down list

Range: 0 ~ 15
Default: 4

Range: 0 ~ 10

This parameter is
internal parameter
of PCU. The
meaning of this
parameter is the
same as
BEPPeriodDown, but
it is to caculate the
uplink measurement
data inside of PCU.
BEP average downlink
filtration cycle

Default: 4

Specify the default


encoding mode of cell's
EGPRS MS initial access

Default: 2

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

249

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

EGPRS Phone Init Coding


1*16 Kbps

Drop down list


Range: MCS 1 , MCS 2
Default: MCS 2

2*16 Kbps

Drop down list


Range: MCS1, MCS2,
MCS3, MCS4, MCS5

It is a four-dimensional
array. It represents the
default-coding mode
corresponding to
EGPRS MS with 1 16
kbps and 4 16 kbps
bandwidth respectively.

Default: MCS5
3*16 Kbps

Drop down list


Range: MCS1, MCS2,
MCS3, MCS4, MCS5,
MCS6
Default: MCS 6

4*16 Kbps

Drop down list


Range: MCS1, MCS2,
MCS3, MCS4, MCS5,
MCS6, MCS7, MCS8,
MCS9
Default: MCS 6

EGPRS phone
initial code can
be changed

Drop down list

Yes

No

Default: Yes

It indicates if the
coding method of
GPRS/EGPRS MS in cell
could be changed
dynamically.

2. Click OK to configure the cell with EDGE support.


END OF STEPS
Result

Cell with EDGE support is successfully configured.

Configuring BCCH TRX


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure BCCH TRX


Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure BCCH TRX, perform the following steps:
1. Rightclick Cell, and click Create Trx in the pop-up menu
as shown in Figure 259.

250

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 259 CONFIGURING BCCH TRX

2. Input User label and configure all parameters in the Create


Trx dialog box, as shown in Figure 260 by referring to Table
77.
FIGURE 260 CONFIGURING BCCH (TRX FREQUENCY INFO)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

251

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

TABLE 77 TRX FREQUENCY INFO P AR AM ETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Frequency information
User label

Character string: 1~40

Unique user label given


to every user

SITE ID

Integer type:1~1536,
default value: 1

Unique ID given to site

BTS ID

Integer type: 1~6

Unique ID given to BTS

TRX ID

TRX type

Integer type: 1 ~ 36

TRXs number in the


cell. According to GSM
specifications, one cell
can have 64 carriers at
most.

Drop down list

Common TRX

Expand TRX

Default: Common TRX

Sub cell ID

Fixed type

Priority

First sub cell

Drop down list


Range: 1 ~ 5
Default value: 1

BCCH carrier
frequency

Drop down list

Yes

No

This parameter
describes priorities for
allocating carriers of
the same type. 1
represents the highest
priority. Select
channels on carriers
with high priority when
allocating channels.
Enabled for BCCH TRX,
Disabled for Non-BCCH
TRX.

Default: No

Static power
level

Drop down list

252

Max output power


Max output power
- 2 dB
Max output power 4 dB
Max output power
- 6 dB
Max output power
- 8 dB
Max output power
- 10 dB

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Usually a static power


control is added on the
basis of TRX
transmission power
specified by Static
power level. Namely,
a restriction is added
based on the
maximum transmission
power, thus to get the
actual maximum
transmission power Pn
of the TRX. The
dynamic power control
is implemented based
on the maximum

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Max output power


- 12 dB

Description
transmission power Pn.

Max output power


+ 0.5 dB
Max output power
+ 1 dB, Max output
power + 1.5 dB

3. Click TRX info tab in Figure 260 and configure TRX info
parameters, by referring to Table 78.
TABLE 78 TRX INFO P ARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

TRX info Parameters


Support Fhs

Drop down list

Yes

No

This parameter
indicates if frequencyhopping is supported.

Default: No
Frequency

Based on the frequency


range

Based on the
frequency range

4. Select row under Rack No, and click Select to allocate it to


Panel Location.
5. Click Channel info, as shown in Figure 261 and configure
parameters accordingly, by referring to Table 79.
6. Double-click the row under Channel info to input necessary
parameters under Channel info tab.
FIGURE 261 CONFIGURING BCCH TRX (CHANNEL INFO)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

253

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

TABLE 79 CHANNEL INFORM ATION

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Channel ID

Integer type: 0~7

Can not
modified

TsChannel
Comb

Drop down list

TCH/F
TCH/H (0, 1)+FACCH/H (0,
1)+SACCH/TH (0, 1)
TCH/H ( 0, 0)+FACCH/H (0,
1)+SACCH/TH
(0,
1)+TCH/H (0, 1)

SDCCH/8 + SACCH/C8

FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH

BCCH+SDCCH/4

BCCH+CCCH

BCCH+SDCCH/4+CBCH

SDCCH+CBCH

TCH/F+FACCH/F+SACCH/M

TCH/F+SACCH/M

TCH/FD+SACCH/MD

be

PBCCH+PCCCH+PDTCH+PA
CCH+PTCCH
PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PT
CCH
PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH

TSC

Integer type: 0 ~ 7

Training serial
code

MAIO

Integer type: 0 ~ 63

Mobile
allocation
index
offset
used
in
frequency
hopping

Dynamic ts

Drop down list

Yes

No

7. Click OK to configure TRX.


Note: For Non-BCCH TRX user can configure frequency
hopping and parameters related to it. For more information on
frequency hopping, refer to Configuring Frequency Hopping.

254

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

END OF STEPS
Result

BCCH TRX is configured successfully. BCCH trx appears in yellow


color in topology management, as shown in Figure 262.
FIGURE 262 CONFIGURED BCCH TRX

Configuring Non-BCCH TRX


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure non-BCCH TRX


Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure non-BCCH TRX, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click Cell node, and click Create Trx in the pop-up
menu
2. Input User label and configure parameters in Create Trx
dialog box, as shown in Figure 263 by referring Table 80.
FIGURE 263 CONFIGURING NON-BCCH TRX (FREQUENCY
INFORM ATION)

3. Select frequency under Frequency drop-down list and select


row under Panel Location. Click Select to allocate it to

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

255

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Panel Location, as shown in Figure 264, by referring to


Table 80.
FIGURE 264 CONFIGURING NON-BCCH TRX INFO (NOT SUPPORTING
FREQUENCY HOPPING)

4. In case TRX supports frequency hopping the user needs to


select YES in support Fhs and select FhsId, select row
under Panel Location and click Select to allocate it to
Panel Location.
Note: Make sure that frequency-hopping system
configured successfully before performing this operation.

is

TABLE 80 TRX INFO P ARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

TRX Info Parameters


Support Fhs

Drop down list

Yes

No

Frequency

Integer type selected


depending on ARFCN list.

User can select


frequency No. and
configure it to intended
panel.

Fhsid

Integer type: 1 ~ 255

Parameter restricts the


frequency hopping
within the specified
range. Parameter is
the keyword to identify
the frequency hopping
object.

5. Click Channel info, as shown in Figure 265 and configure


parameters accordingly, by referring to Table 81.
6. Double-click the row under Channel ID to input necessary
parameters under Channel info tab.

256

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 265 CONFIGURING NON-BCCH TRX (CHANNEL INFO)

TABLE 81 CHANNEL INFORM ATION

Parameter

Type and Range

Channel ID

Integer type: 0~7

TsChannel
Comb

Drop down list

TSC

Can not be
modified

TCH/F
TCH/H (0, 1)+FACCH/H
1)+SACCH/TH (0, 1)

(0,

TCH/H ( 0, 0)+FACCH/H (0,


1)+SACCH/TH (0, 1)+TCH/H
(0, 1)

SDCCH/8 + SACCH/C8

FCCH+SCH+BCCH+CCCH

BCCH+SDCCH/4

BCCH+CCCH

BCCH+SDCCH/4+CBCH

SDCCH+CBCH

TCH/F+FACCH/F+SACCH/M

TCH/F+SACCH/M

TCH/FD+SACCH/MD

Descriptio
n

PBCCH+PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH
+PTCCH

PCCCH+PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH

PDTCH+PACCH+PTCCH

Integer type: 0 ~ 7

Training
serial code

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

257

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

MAIO

Integer type: 0 ~ 63

Dynamic ts

Drop down list

7.

Yes

No

Descriptio
n
Mobile
allocation
index offset
used
in
frequency
hopping

Click OK to configure TRX.

END OF STEPS
Result

Non-BCCH TRX configured successfully, as shown in Figure 266.


FIGURE 266 CONFIGURED NON-BCCH TRX

Configuring Frequency Hopping


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure frequency hopping


Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure frequency hoping, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click Cell node, and click Create Frequency
Hopping System as shown in Figure 267.

258

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 267 CONFIGURING FREQUENCY HOPPING SYSTEM

Note: Before creating frequency hopping, make sure that


ARFCN list is created in cell basic parameters, as shown in Figure
268.
FIGURE 268 ARFCN LIST IN CELL BASIC P AR AMETERS

2. Input User label, and configure frequency-hopping


parameters as shown in Figure 269, by referring to Table 82.
3. Select MA frequency value from spin box and click Add to
allocate it to MA frequency list, as shown in Figure 269.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

259

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 269 CREATING FREQUENCY HOPPING SYSTEM DIALOG BOX

TABLE 82 FREQUENCY HOPPING P ARAM ETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

User label

Character string: 1~40

Unique user label given to


every site

Integer type:1~1536

Unique ID given to site

Site ID

Default value: 1

260

BTS ID

Fixed, as given during


creating site

Frequency
Hopping
Number

Integer type: 1~255

Hopping
Sequence
No

Integer type: 0~63

Frequency
hopping
Mode

RF ID freq hopping

MA
frequency
list

Compound non-symbol
shaping, value range:

Default value: 1

Default value: 0

0, [1124], [512885],

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Unique number used to


identify the frequency
hoping sequence.
According to GSM 05.02
Frequency Hoping
Algorithm, MAI is a
function of TDMA Frame
number (FN), Hoping
Sequence Number (HSN)
and Mobile Allocation
Index Offset (MAIO). HSN
determines the operation
track of frequencies
during the frequency
hopping process. Using
different HSN for cells
having the same MA can
avoid frequency
utilization conflict
between adjacent cells
during the frequency
hopping process.
Only RF ID freq hopping
is supported by system.
User can select required
number in the range
depending on frequency

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

[9751023]

band used.

END OF STEPS
Result

Frequency hopping system is configured successfully as shown in


Figure 270.
FIGURE 270 CONFIGURED FREQUENCY HOPPING SYSTEM

Configuring Adjacent Reselection


Cell
Purpose

To configure adjacent reselection cell

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured


and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.

Steps

To configure adjacent cell reselection, perform the following


steps:
1. Right-click Cell node, and click Create Adjacent cell
reselection as shown in Figure 271.
FIGURE 271 SELECTING ADJACENT CELL RESELECTION

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

261

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

2. Configure Create Adjacent-cell reselection parameters as


shown in Figure 272, by referring to Table 83.
FIGURE 272 CONFIGURING ADJACENT CELL RESELECTION
P AR AMETERS

TABLE 83 ADJACENT CELL RESELECTION P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Characters or number or
combination of both: 1~40

Site ID

Integer type: 1~1536,


default value: 1

Unique ID given to Site


ID

BTS ID

Integer type: 1~6

Unique ID given to BTS

Adjacent
cell
reselection
object ID

Integer type: 1~31, default


value: 1

Adjacent
cell report
priority

Integer type: 0~1, default


value: 0

Related cell
DN

Description

User can select 0 or 1


from drop down list
depending on actual
configuration.
This parameter is used
to determine DN
(BssId-SiteId-BtsIdHold) of the handover
cell or DN (EcId) of the
external cell.

3. Click Select as shown in Figure 272, and select reselection


cell as shown in Figure 273.

262

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 273 SELECTING ADJACENT RESELECTION CELL

4. Click OK, to select the cell as reselection cell of target cell.


END OF STEPS
Result

Adjacent cell reselection is configured successfully, as shown in


Figure 274.
FIGURE 274 CONFIGURED ADJACENT RESELECTION CELL

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

263

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Configuring Adjacent Handover Cell


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure adjacent handover cell


Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure adjacent handover cell, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click Cell node, and click Create Adjacent cell
handover as shown in Figure 275.
FIGURE 275 CREATING ADJACENT CELL HANDOVER

2. Input User label, and configure Create Adjacent-cell


handover parameters, by referring to Table 84.

264

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 276 CONFIGURING ADJACENT CELL HANDOVER

TABLE 84 ADJACENT CELL HANDOVER P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Character string:
1~40

SITE ID

Integer type:
1~1536,

Description

default value: 1
BTS ID

Integer type: 1~6

Adjacent cell
handover object
ID

Integer type: 1~32,

Priority of
handover

Integer type: 0~7,

Maximum power
level of MS

Integer type: 0~31,

default: 1

default value: 0

default value : 5

According to GSM
specifications, cell
priority should be
considered in sequencing
candidate cells. The
larger this parameter
value, the higher the cell
priority.
This parameter controls
the uplink transmission
power during
communication between
MS and BTS. SACCH
carries the power
command with 2 header
bytes information (power
control byte and timing
advance byte) from BSS

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

265

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
to MS.

Min power level of


handover access

Integer type: 0~63,

0: < -110 dBm;

default value: 15

1: -110 dBm ~ -109


dBm;
2: -109 dBm ~ -108
dBm; ;
62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm;
63: > -48 dBm

Minimum
threshold of
signal level for
handover on
PBGT

Integer type: 0~48,


default value: 30

This parameter defines


the threshold used to
determine PBGT
handover from an
adjacent cell to local cell.
0: -24 dB;
1: -23 dB; ;
48: 24 dB

Minimum
threshold of
signal level for
handover on
power level

Integer type: 0~48,


default value: 30

This parameter defines


the signal strength
threshold to determine
handover from adjacent
cell to local cell.
0: -24 dB;
1: -23 dB; ;
48: 24 dB

Minimum
threshold of
signal level for
handover on
quality

Integer type: 0~48,


default value: 30

This parameter defines


the signal quality
threshold to determine
handover from adjacent
cell to local cell.
0: -24 dB;
1: -23 dB; ;
48: 24 dB

Maximum level
difference of force
handover

Integer type: 0~48

Handover
resource
threshold

Integer
0~100,

force

type:

default value: 40

266

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

In order to avoid
handover oscillations in
cells, a tolerable level
difference for forced
handover is required,
which should be lower
than PBGT handover
threshold in the reverse
direction. This parameter
defines the maximum
level difference value for
forced handover.
In order to avoid
congestion in the cell,
this parameter defines a
threshold value for
forced handover. When
resource of object cell is
lower than the

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
congestion threshold,
forced handover can be
implemented.

Neighboring cell
layer

Drop down list

Undefined
Same layer of
the home cell
Upper layer of
the home cell
Lower layer of
the home cell

This
parameter
provides the handover
policies in multilayer
network
technology
and
dual-frequency
network technology.
Same layer of the
home cell: Adjacent
cell and local cell are
in the same layer
(PBGT
handover
possible)
Upper layer of the
home cell: Adjacent
cell is the upper layer
of local cell (local cell
is a micro cell)
Lower layer of the
home cell: Adjacent
cell is the lower layer
of local cell (local cell
is a macro cell)

CS adjacent cell
report priority

Is related cell

Is handover
forced
neighboring cell

Drop down list

0: Low

1: High

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

This parameter defines


the priority of adjacent
cells to report the
measurement report
during CS traffic
operation.
This is a parameter of
adjacent cell and is used
to indicate whether
adjacent cell is related to
the serving cell.
In the case of 1800M and
900M network sharing
site, it is better to
handover subscribers of
900M network to 1800M
network.
Forced handover is a
method for on-site traffic
adjustment. The forced
handover direction is
definite, i.e. 1800M
sector in the same
direction. To avoid

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

267

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
influence on other cells,
the forced handover is
performed only for a
specific object cell.

Related Cell DN

This parameter is used to


determine DN (BssIdSiteId-BtsId-Hold) of the
handover cell or DN
(EcId) of the external
cell.

3. Click Select as shown Figure 276, and select target cell from
the hierarchy tree as shown in Figure 277.
FIGURE 277 SELECTING ADJACENT HANDOVER CELL

4. Click OK, as shown in Figure 277, and Figure 276 to


configure selected cell as adjacent handover cell.
END OF STEPS
Result

268

Adjacent cell handover is configured successfully, as shown in


Figure 278.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 278 CONFIGURED ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER

Configuring Adjacent Handover and


Reselection Cell
Purpose

To configure adjacent handover and reselection cell

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured


and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.

Steps

To configure adjacent cell handover and reselection, perform the


following steps:
1. Right-click Cell node, and click Create Adjacent cell
handover and reselection as in Figure 279.
FIGURE 279 CREATING ADJACENT HANDOVER AND RESELECTION CELL

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

269

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

2. Input User label and Configure Adjacent cell handover


and reselection parameters, as shown in Figure 280, by
referring to Table 85.
FIGURE 280 CONFIGURING ADJACENT CELL HANDOVER AND
RESELECTION

TABLE 85 ADJACENT CELL HANDOVER AND RESELECTION


P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Character string:
1~40

SITE ID

Integer type:
1~1536,

Description

default value: 1

270

BTS ID

Integer type: 1~6

Adjacent cell
reselection
and
handover ID

Integer type:
1~32, default
value: 1

This parameter is a unique


identification of adjacent cell
handover and reselection
object.

Priority of
handover

Integer type: 0~7,

According to GSM
specifications, cell priority
should be considered in
sequencing candidate cells.
The larger this parameter
value, the higher the cell

default value : 0

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
priority.

Maximum
power level
of MS

Integer type:
0~31,

Min power
level for
handover
access

Integer type:
0~63,

default value : 5

default value: 15

This parameter controls the


uplink transmission power
during communication
between MS and BTS. SACCH
carries the power command
with 2 header bytes
information (power control
byte and timing advance
byte) from BSS to MS.
0: < -110 dBm;
1: -110 dBm ~ -109 dBm; 2:
-109 dBm ~ -108 dBm ;

;
62: -49 dBm ~ -48 dBm; 63:
> -48 dBm

Minimum
threshold of
signal level
for handover
on PBGT

Integer type:
0~48,

0: -24 dB;

default value: 30

1: -23 dB;
;
48: 24 dB

Minimum
threshold of
signal level
for handover
on power
level

Integer type:
0~48,

0: -24 dB;

default value: 30

Minimum
threshold of
signal level
for handover
on quality

Integer type:
0~48,

1: -23 dB;
;
48: 24 dB

default value: 30

0: -24 dB;
1: -23 dB;

;
48: 24 dB

Maximum
level
difference of
force
handover

Integer type:
0~48

In order to avoid handover


oscillations in cells, a
tolerable level difference for
forced handover is required,
which should be lower than
PBGT handover threshold in
the reverse direction. This
parameter defines the
maximum level difference
value for forced handover.

Handover
force
resource
threshold

Integer type:
0~100,

In order to avoid congestion


in the cell, this parameter
defines a threshold value for
forced handover. When
resource of object cell is
lower than the congestion
threshold, forced handover

default value: 40

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

271

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
can be implemented.

Neighboring
cell layer

Drop down list

CS adjacent
cell report
priority

Undefined
Same layer
of the home
cell
Upper layer
of the home
cell
Lower layer
of the home
cell

Drop down list

0: Low

1: High

PS adjacent
cell report
priority

Integer type: 0~1,

Is related
cell

Drop down list

Is handover
forced
neighboring
cell

default value: 0

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Same layer of the home


cell: Adjacent cell and
local cell are in the same
layer
(PBGT
handover
possible).
Upper layer of the home
cell: Adjacent cell is the
upper layer of local cell
(local cell is a micro cell).
Lower layer of the home
cell: Adjacent cell is the
lower layer of local cell
(local cell is a macro cell).
This parameter defines the
priority of adjacent cells to
report the measurement
report during CS traffic
operation.
This parameter defines the
priority of adjacent cells to
report the measurement
report during PS traffic
operation.
Only the cell related to the
serving cell can be a
candidate in rapid fading
handover. This is a
parameter of adjacent cell
and is used to indicate
whether adjacent cell is
related to the serving cell.
In the case of 1800M and
900M network sharing site, it
is better to handover
subscribers of 900M network
to 1800M network.
Forced handover is a method
for on-site traffic adjustment.
The forced handover
direction is definite, i.e.
1800M sector in the same
direction. To avoid influence
on other cells, the forced
handover is performed only
for a specific object cell.

Related Cell
DN

272

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This parameter is used to


determine DN (BssId-SiteIdBtsId-Hold) of the handover
cell or DN (EcId) of the
external cell.

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

3. Click Select as shown in Figure 280, and select target cell


from drop-down list as shown in Figure 281.
FIGURE 281 SELECTING ADJACENT CELL HANDOVER AND
RESELECTION CELL

4. Click OK, as shown in Figure 281, and Figure 280 to


configure selected cell as adjacent handover and reselection
cell.
END OF STEPS
Result

Adjacent cell handover and reselection


successfully as shown in Figure 282.

cell

configured

FIGURE 282 CONFIGURED ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER AND RESELECTION


CELL

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

273

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Configuring Adjacent Interference


Cell
Purpose

To configure adjacent interference cell

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured


and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.

Steps

To configure adjacent interference cell, perform the following


steps:
1. Right-click on Cell node and then, click Create Adjacent
interference cell in the pop-up menu as shown in Figure
283.
FIGURE 283 CONFIGURING ADJACENT INTERFERENCE CELL

2. Input User label and parameters in Create Adjacent


Interference Cell dialog box as in Figure 284, by referring
to Table 86.

274

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 284 CREATE ADJACENT INTERFERENCE CELL DIALOG BOX

TABLE 86 ADJACENT INTERFERENCE CELL P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Character string: 1~40

Site ID

Integer type: 1~1536,


default value: 1

BTS ID

Integer type:: 1~6

Interference cell
No.

Integer type: 1~6,

Related cell DN

default value: 1
This parameter defines BSS external cell DN:
EcId or related BSS equipment DN: BscIdSiteId-BtsId.

3. Click Select, and select target cell from the interface as


shown in Figure 285.
FIGURE 285 SELECTING ADJACENT INTERFERENCE CELL

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

275

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

4. Click OK, as shown in Figure 285 and Figure 284 to configure


selected cell as adjacent interference cell.
END OF STEPS
Result

Adjacent interference cell is configured successfully, as shown in


Figure 286.
FIGURE 286 CONFIGURED ADJACENT INTERFERENCE CELL

Modifying Cell Power Control


Parameters
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To modify cell power control parameters


Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To modify power control parameters, perform the following steps:
1. Double click on Power control 1 node, under Cell node as
shown in Figure 287.
FIGURE 287 MODIFYING CELL POWER CONTROL P ARAMETERS

276

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

2. Click
and click Power control tab to modify power
control parameters by referring Figure 288 ~ Figure 291 and
Table 87 ~ Table 90.
FIGURE 288 MODIFYING POWER CONTROL P AR AMETERS (POWER
CONTROL)

TABLE 87 MODIFYING POWER CONTROL P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Character string: 1~40

Site ID

Integer type

BTS ID

Integer type

Power control
ID

Integer type

Rapid Power
Control
indication

Drop down list

Yes

No

Description

Rapid power control


process is an
optional process of
BSC. It reduces the
interference of the
whole BSS radio
system and satisfies
the dynamic power
control requirement
for rapid moving

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

277

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
MS.

Power control
Power level
Power level 0

Pwr DecrLimit

Description

Integer Type: 0~38,


default value: 24

Power level 1

Integer Type: 0~38,


default value: 22

Power level 2

Integer Type: 0~38,


default value: 20

Power level 3

Integer Type: 0~38,


default value: 18

Power level 4

Integer Type: 0~38,


default value: 16

Power level 5

Integer Type: 0~38,


default value: 14

Power level 6

Integer Type: 0~38,


default value: 12

Power level 7

Integer Type: 0~38,


default value: 10

This parameter is set for


preventing MS from call
drop due to fast power
control. It corresponds to
different quality level. For
example, PwrDecrLimit
[0] determines the
maximum power decrease
limit for calls with receiving
quality level 0 (Bit Error
rate (BER) <0.2%). This
parameter is valid for both
uplink and downlink.
This parameter is an array of
eight elements, with element
length of one byte.
PwrDecrLimit [n] determines
the maximum power decrease
limit available for calls with
quality level n.

FIGURE 289 MODIFYING POWER CONTROL P AR AMETERS (POWER SURVEY)

TABLE 88 MODIFYING POWER SURVEY P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Report Period of
measurement for
power control

Integer Type: 1~254,

Uplink level

278

default value: 240


Sample Count

Weight

Integer Type: 1~31,

Integer Type: 1~3,

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range


default value: 6

default value: 2

Downlink level

Integer Type: 1~31,


default value: 6

Integer Type: 1~3,


default value: 2

Uplink quality

Integer Type: 1~31,


default value: 6

Integer Type: 1~3,


default value: 2

Down link quality

Integer Type: 1~31,


default value: 6

Integer Type: 1~3,


default value: 2

FIGURE 290 MODIFYING POWER CONTROL P AR AMETERS (POWER


ADJUST THRESHOLD)

TABLE 89 MODIFYING POWER ADJUST THRESHOLD PAR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range


Threshold

Value P

Value N

Increase
uplink level

Integer Type:
0~63, default
value: 22

Integer Type:
0~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 4

Increase
downlink
level

Integer Type:
0~63, default
value: 26

Integer Type:
0~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 4

Decrease
uplink level

Integer Type:
0~63, default
value: 30

Integer Type:
0~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 4

Decrease
downlink
level

Integer Type:
0~63, default
value: 34

Integer Type:
0~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 4

Increase
uplink
quality

Integer Type:
0~7, default
value: 2

Integer Type:
0~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 4

Decrease
uplink

Integer Type:
0~7, default

Integer Type:
0~31, default

Integer Type:
1~31, default

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

279

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

quality

value: 2

value: 3

value: 4

Increase
downlink
level

Integer Type:
0~7, default
value: 0

Integer Type:
0~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 4

Decrease
downlink
level.

Integer Type:
0~7, default
value:20

Integer Type:
0~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 4

FIGURE 291 MODIFYING POWER CONTROL P AR AMETRS (OTHERS)

TABLE 90 MODIFYING POWER CONTROL OTHER P AR AMETERS

Parameter
Minimum interval
of power control

Type and Range


Integer Type: 1~255,
default value: 2

Description
This parameter
specifies the
minimum interval of
power control.
Usually, MS still
sends two
measurement
reports with the
original power to
BSC after enabling
the power control.

Power restriction
MAX power level
of MS

280

Integer Type: 0~31,


default value: 5

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This parameter
controls the
transmission power
during
communication
between MS and

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
BTS. SACCH carries
the command with 2
header bytes
information (power
control byte and
timing advance
byte) from BSS to
MS.

Minimum power
level of MS

Integer Type: 0~31,


default value: 16

MIN power level of


BS

Integer Type: 0~15,


default value: 10

Power Control
Uplink power
control allowed

Downlink power
control allowed

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

This parameter
determines to
enable or disable
MS uplink power
control in the cell.
This power control is
only effective to
TCH/F.
This parameter
determines whether
to enable or disable
BTS downlink power
control in the cell.

Step
Power increasing
step (2,4,6 db)

Drop down list

This parameter
defines the power
increasing step. It
applies to both
uplink and downlink
directions.

Default: 2 db
Power decreasing
step (2,4 db)

Drop down list

This parameter
defines the power
decreasing step. It
applies to both
uplink and downlink
directions.

Default: 2 db

3. Click

on the toolbar to save modification.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

281

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

END OF STEPS
Result

Cell power-control parameters are successfully modified.

Modifying Cell Handover Control


Parameters
Purpose
Perquisites
Steps

To modify cell handover control parameters


Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To modify cell
following steps:

handover-control

parameters,

perform

the

1. Double-click on Handover control1 as shown in Figure 292.


FIGURE 292 MODIFYING CELL HANDOVER CONTROL PAR AMETERS

2. Click
and click Handover Controlol1 tab and modify
handover control parameters by referring Figure 293 ~
Figure 299 and Table 91 ~ Table 97.

282

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 293 MODIFYING HANDOVER CONTROL P AR AMETERS


(HANDOVER CONTROL)

TABLE 91 MODIFYING CELL HANDOVER CONTROL P ARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Allow SDCCH handover

Drop down list

Allow inter-cell handover


attempt due to uplink
interference

Allow inter-cell handover


attempt due to downlink
interference

Allow handover due to


distance

Allow standard PBGT


handover

Allow automatic
handover based on traffic

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

283

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Allow handover base on


direction

Allow handover base on


homocentric circularity

Allow intra-cell handover


in super TRX channel due
to downlink interference

Allow intra-cell handover


in super TRX channel due
to uplink interference

Allow intra-cell handover


in super TRX channel due
to PBGT

Allow dynamic
adjustment of handover
priority

Allow rapid handover

Allow Macro-Macro delay


handover

Allow Micro-Micro delay


handover

Allow internal handover


based on TA

Allow force transfer


handover

284

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Drop down list

Yes

No

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 294 MODIFYING HANDOVER CONTROL P AR AMETERS (OTHERS)

TABLE 92 MODIFYING HANDOVER CONTROL OTHER P ARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Penalty time for handover


failure

Integer Type: 1~255,

Difference of dynamic
priority

Integer Type: 1~7,

PBGT difference

Integer Type: 0~20,

default value: 7
default value: 1
default value: 3

Layer control value for


handover on traffic

Integer Type: 0~3,

Frequency control value for


handover on traffic

Drop down list

Threshold of traffic for


handover

default value: 1

GSM 900

EXT 900

DCS 1800

PCS 1900

GSM 850

Integer Type: 0~100,


default value: 70

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

285

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 295 MODIFYING HANDOVER CONTROL P AR AMETERS (HANDOVER


ARITHMETIC)

TABLE 93 MODIFYING HANDOVER ARITHMETIC P ARAM ETERS

286

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Traffic handover
threshold

Integer Type: 0~48,

This parameter is used


for traffic handover.
For the original
handover condition
that adjacent cells
level must be higher
than that of this cell,
modify it so that
adjacent cells level
must be higher than
this threshold.

Level offset during


penalty

Integer Type: 0~63,

Uplink interference
quality offset

Integer Type: 0~2,

default value: 24

default value: 15

default value: 1

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This parameter is used


to perform an offset on
the downlink level of
this cell in the penalty
period.
Check the relation
between level and
quality to judge

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description
whether there is any
interference in service
judgment channel
when handover occurs
in the cell.

Uplink interference
level offset

Integer Type: 0~20,

Downlink
interference
quality offset

Integer Type: 0~2,

Downlink
interference level
offset

Integer Type: 0~20,

Invalid-intra
handover time

Integer Type: 0~255,

default value: 15

default value: 1

default value: 10

default value: 16

Same as the uplink


interference quality
offset parameter.
Same as the uplink
interference quality
offset parameter.
Same as the uplink
interference quality
offset parameter.
If handover occurs
within the invalid intrahandover time, then
the previous handover
is considered to have
no influence on
interference, the
counter HoCount
increases by 1 and
restart TMaxIHo. If
handover occurs after
the invalid intrahandover time, the
previous handover is
considered valid and
clear the counter to 0.
If the counter value
reaches the value of
MAX count of invalid
intra-handover
parameter, then it
indicates not to
attempt handover
within a certain period.

Maximum count
for invalid intra
handover

Integer Type: 0~10,

Maximum path
loss threshold on
force handover

Integer Type: 0~150,

Max times
advance on forced
handover

Integer Type: 0~63,

N value of force
handover

Integer Type: 1~31,

P value of force
handover

Integer Type: 1~31,

default value: 3

default value: 110

default value: 5

default value: 4
default value: 3

Same as the invalid


intra-handover time
parameter.
Threshold value of path
loss for force handover
Maximum time
advance on force
handover
N value of force
handover
P value of force
handover

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

287

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 296 MODIFYING HANDOVER CONTROL P AR AMETERS (SUB CELL


P AR AMETERS)

TABLE 94 MODIFYING HANDOVER CONTROL SUBCELL P AR AMETERS

Parameter
Dual band power offset

Type and Range


Integer Type: 0~50,
default value: 0

The MAX of path loss

Integer Type: 0~150,


default value: 126

The MIN of path loss

Integer Type: 0~150,


default value: 120

The MAX of time advance

Integer Type:0~63,
default value: 1

The MIN of timing advance

Integer Type:0~63,
default value: 0

N value of subcell handover

Integer Type:1~10,
default value: 4

P value of subcell handover

Integer Type:1~10,
default value: 4

Subcell handover algorithm

Drop down list

288

Concentric handover
Handover based on path loss
and TA

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 297 MODIFYING HANDOVER CONTROL P AR AMETERS (HANDOVER


PRETREATMENT)

TABLE 95 MODIFYING HANDOVER CONTROL PRETREATMENT P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Character string: 1~40

Site ID

Integer type

BTS ID

Integer type

Handover control
ID

Integer type

Number of zeros
allowed in AV

Integer Type: 0~31, default value: 1


Sample

Weight

Uplink power
level

Integer Type: 1~31,


default value: 4

Integer Type: 1~3,


default value: 2

Downlink power
level

Integer Type: 1~31,


default value: 4

Integer Type: 1~3,


default value: 2

Uplink quality

Integer Type: 1~31,


default value: 4

Integer Type: 1~31,


default value: 4

Downlink quality

Integer Type: 1~31,


default value: 4

Integer Type: 1~31,


default value: 4

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

289

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Distance

Integer Type: 1~31,


default value: 4

Neighboring Cell

Integer Type: 1~31,


default value: 2

FIGURE 298 MODIFYING HANDOVER CONTROL P AR AMETERS (HANDOVER


LEVEL)

TABLE 96 MODIFYING HANDOVER LEVEL P AR AMETERS

Parameters

290

Type and Range


Threshold

Value N

Value P

Uplink receive
level

Integer Type:
1~63, default
value: 15

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 2

Downlink
receive level

Integer Type:
1~63, default
value: 15

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 2

Uplink receive
quality

Integer Type:
0~7, default
value: 4

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 2

Downlink
receive quality

Integer Type:
0~7, default
value: 4

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 2

Uplink receive
quality of intra
handover

Integer Type:
0~63, default
value: 35

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 2

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameters

Type and Range


Threshold

Value N

Value P

Downlink
receives quality
of intra
handover.

Integer Type:
0~63, default
value: 40

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 2

Good C/I

Integer Type:
0~255, default
value: 133

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 2

Bad C/ I

Integer Type:
0~255, default
value: 130

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 2

Rapid handover

Integer Type:
0~63, default
value: 10

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 2

Handover from
macro to micro

Integer Type:
0~62, default
value: 20

Integer Type:
1~255, default
value: 2

Distance
handover

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 2

PBGT handover

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~31, default
value: 2

FIGURE 299 MODIFYING HANDOVER CONTROL P AR AMETERS (HANDOVER


CONDITION)

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

291

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

TABLE 97 MODIFYING HANDOVER CONDITION P AR AM ETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

The MAX time advance


threshold between MS and
BTS

Integer Type: 0~63, default value: 63

MIN interval between interCell handover

Integer Type: 0~31, default value: 5

Prior layer selecting


parameter on signal
level/quality

Integer Type: 1~3, default value: 2

Layer adapting to PBGT


handover

Integer Type: 0~15, default value: 3


Handover Method

Synchronization

User can select Yes or No from dropdown list depending on actual


configuration.

Synchronization

User can select Yes or No from dropdown list depending on actual


configuration.

Pseudo-synchronization

User can select Yes or No from dropdown list depending on actual


configuration.

Pre-synchronization

User can select Yes or No from dropdown list depending on actual


configuration.

3. Click

to save modifications.

END OF STEPS
Result

Cell handover-control parameters are successfully modified.

UTRAN Cell Parameter


Configuration and
Modification
This section consists of the following topics:

292

Configuring UTRAN Adjacent Reselection Cell

Configuring UTRAN Adjacent Handover Cell

Configuring UTRAN Adjacent Handover And Reselection Cell

Modifying UTRAN Cell Control Parameters

Modifying UTRAN Cell Handover Control Parameters

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Configuring UTRAN Adjacent


Reselection Cell
Purpose

To configure UTRAN adjacent reselection cell

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured


and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.

Steps

To configure UTRAN adjacent reselection, perform the following


steps:
1. Right-click cell node and then, click Create UTRAN
adjacent cell reselection as shown in Figure 300.
FIGURE 300 CREATING UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL RESELECTION

2. Input User label and configure Create UTRAN adjacent


cell reselection parameters, as shown in Figure 301, by
referring to Table 98.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

293

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 301 CONFIGURING UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL RESELECTION

TABLE 98 UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL RESECTION P ARAMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Character string: 1~40

SITE ID

Integer type: 1~1536, default value: 1

BTS ID

Integer type: 1~6

Adjacent UTRAN cell


reselection object ID

Integer type: 1~64, default value:1

PS priority of adjacent
cell reported in
measurement report.

Drop down list

3. Click Select, and select UTRAN target cell from the list as
shown in Figure 302. Click OK as shown in Figure 301 to
configure selected cell as UTRAN adjacent cell reselection cell.
FIGURE 302 SELECTING UTR AN ADJ ACENT RESELECTION CELL

END OF STEPS
Result

294

UTRAN adjacent cell reselection is successfully configured as


shown in Figure 303.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 303 CONFIGURED UTR AN ADJ ACENT RESELECTION CELL

Configuring UTRAN Adjacent


Handover Cell
Purpose

To configure UTRAN adjacent handover cell

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured


and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.

Steps

To configure UTRAN adjacent handover cell, perform the


following steps:
1. Right-click cell node and then, click Create UTRAN
adjacent cell handover in the pop-up menu as shown in
Figure 304.
FIGURE 304 CONFIGURING UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER

2. Input User label and configure UTRAN adjacent cell


handover parameters as shown in Figure 305, by referring to
Table 99.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

295

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 305 CREATE UTRAN ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER DIALOG BOX

TABLE 99 UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Character string: 1~40

SITE ID

Integer type: 1~1536, default value: 1

BTS ID

Integer type: 1~6

UTRAN HO ID

Integer type: 1~64, default value: 1

RSCP offset handover

Integer type: 0~63, default value: 5

EC/No offset
handover

Integer type: 0~49, default value: 5

Priority

Drop down list

3. Click Select, as shown in Figure 305 and select UTARN


adjacent cell handover from the list as shown in Figure 306.
FIGURE 306 SELECTING UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER CELL

4. Click OK, as shown in Figure 305 to configure the selected


cell as UTARN adjacent cell handover.
END OF STEPS
Result

296

UTRAN adjacent cell handover is successfully configured as


shown in Figure 307.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 307 CONFIGURED UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER

Configuring UTRAN Adjacent


Handover and Reselection Cell
Purpose

To configure UTRAN adjacent handover and reselection cell

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured


and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.

Steps

To configure UTRAN adjacent handover and reselection cell,


perform the following steps:
1. Right-click cell node and then, click Create UTRAN
adjacent cell handover and reselection, in the pop-up
menu.
FIGURE 308 CONFIGURING UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER AND
RESELECTION

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

297

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

2. Input User label and configure UTRAN adjacent cell


handover and reselection parameters as shown in Figure 308,
by referring to Table 100.
TABLE 100 UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER AND RESELECTION
P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Character string: 1~40

SITE ID

Integer type: 1~1536, default value: 1

BTS ID

Integer type : 1~6

Adjacent UTRAN cell


handover and
reselection object ID

Integer type: 1~64, default value: 1

RSCP offset handover


to adjacent UTRAN
cell

Integer type: 0~63, default value: 5

EC/No offset
handover to UTRAN
adjacent cell

Integer type: 0~49, default value: 5

CS priority of adjacent
cell reported in
measurement report

User can select 0 or 1 from drop-down


list depending on actual configuration.

PS priority of adjacent
cell reported in
measurement report

Drop down list

3. Click Select and select the target cell from the list, as shown
in Figure 309.
FIGURE 309 SELECTING UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER AND
RESELECTION CELL

4. Click OK as shown in Figure 308 to configure the selected


cell as UTRAN adjacent cell handover and reselection cell.
END OF STEPS
Result

298

UTRAN adjacent cell handover and reselection parameters are


configured successfully as shown in Figure 310.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

FIGURE 310 CONFIGURED UTR AN ADJ ACENT CELL HANDOVER AND


RESELECTION

Modifying UTRAN Cell Control


Parameters
Purpose

To modify UTRAN cell control parameters

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured


and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.

Steps

To modify UTRAN cell control parameters, perform the following


steps:
1. Double-click UTRAN cell control1 under cell node as shown
in Figure 311.
FIGURE 311 MODIFYING UTR AN CELL CONTROL PAR AMETERS

2. Click
and click Basic params1 and modify parameters
in the respective tabs by referring Figure 312 ~ Figure 315
and Table 101 ~ Table 104.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

299

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 312 MODIFYING UTR AN CELL CONTROL P ARAMETERS (BASIC


P AR AMETERS 1)

TABLE 101 MODIFYING UTR AN CELL CONTROL P ARAMETERS (BASIC


P AR AMETERS 1)

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Character string:
1~40

Site ID

Integer type

BTS ID

Integer type

Channel
location of si2
quarter
broadcast

Drop down list

CS
measurement
type reported
by query

Drop down list

Description

0: Broadcast on normal
BCCH block
1: Broadcast on extended
BCCH block
(AGCH_BLOCK
reservation value will be
1)
0: Adopts enhanced
measurement report
message, if at least one
BSIC is configured for
each frequency in BA list;
otherwise, adopt normal
measurement report
message.
1: Adopts normal
measurement report
message

300

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Measurement
threshold of UE
performed
performing
UTRAN cell
reselection

Drop down list

Threshold when
UE performs
search under
specialize
mode.

Drop down list

Initial
parameter
instead of
qsearch c
before receiving
qserach_c

Integer type

CS number of
same frequency
adjacent cell
with report

Drop down list

Range: 0~15
Default: 15

Range: 0~15
Default: 15

Description
This parameter indicates
the measurement
threshold of UE
performing UTRAN cell
reselection. UE starts
UTRAN reselection cell
measurement when
average receiving level
RLA_C of this cell is lower
than (parameter value: 0
~ 7) or higher than
(parameter value: 8 ~
15) the threshold.
This parameter defines a
threshold. When average
receiving level RLA_C of
the cell falls below
(parameter value: 0 ~ 7)
or higher than
(parameter value: 8 ~
15) this threshold, UE
searches the UTRAN
adjacent cell.
0: Indicates Qsearch_I
parameter
1: Indicates always
measuring

Range: 0~3
Default: 2

This parameter defines


the number of adjacent
cells with the same
frequency band as in
serving cell, which are
included in the
measurement report or
the strongest cell list.

FDD property
CS class of
reported
quantity of
UTRAN adjacent
cell

MIN Ec/No of
UTRAN
reselecting cell

Drop down list

Drop down list


Range: 0~7
Default: 0
indicating (20 +
n) dBm.

0: RSCP, receiving power


of CPICH scramble of this
UTRAN cell at UE, the
unit is dBm;
1: Ec/No, ratio of
receiving power and
thermal noise of CPICH
scramble of UTRAN cell,
the unit is dB.
The value of Ec/No of the
UTRAN cell should be
larger than the value
defined by this parameter
in order to reselect the
adjacent cell.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

301

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

CS MAX
number of
UTRAN/FDD
adjacent cell
in
measurement
report

Drop down list

FDD reselection
offset

Drop down list

Range: 0~3
Default: 2

Description
This parameter indicates
the maximum number of
UTRAN/FDD adjacent
cells included in packet
measurement report or
strongest cell list. If
UTRAN/FDD adjacent
cells are not full, the
vacancies are used for
GSM adjacent cells. (If
TDD technology is
available, the vacancies
are used for TDD cells).

Range: 0~15
Default: 8

Require UE to
send
measurement
class mark
change
message early

Drop down list

Yes

No

NO: Not allowed to


send
UTRAN
class
mark change message
YES: Require UE to send
UTRAN class mark
change message early

FIGURE 313 MODIFYING UTR AN CELL CONTROL P ARAMETERS (BASIC


PROPERTIES 2)

302

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

TABLE 102 MODIFYING UTR AN CELL CONTROL P ARAMETERS (BASIC


P AR AMETERS 2)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

CS measurement
reporting rate of
adjacent cell

Drop down list

0: Normal

CS multiband
report indication

1: Low

Drop down list


Range: 0~3
Default: 0

CS offset which is
added when UE
reports rxlev value

Drop down list


Range: 0~2
Default: 0

This parameter is to
control the number
of reports of different
adjacent cells except
the serving cell.
This parameter
defines the added
offset when UE
reports signal field
intensity.

0: 0 dB
1: 10 dB
2: Automatic,
determined by UE
TDD Property
TDD reselection
offset

Drop down list


Range: 0~15
Default: 8

CS MAX number of
UTRAN/TDD
adjacent cell in
measurement
report

Drop down list

CS
UE
report
invalid cell level
allowed

Drop down list

Range: 0~3
Default: 2

No
Yes

Drop down list

CS UE search
UTRAN adjacent
cell in BSIC
decoding frame
indication

No

Yes

Adjacent cell
reporting signal

GSM 850, GSM 900,


GSM 1800, GSM 1900,

When BCC is not


configured, NCC is
permitted for BSIC of
some GSM cells. This
parameter indicates
whether the system
allows UE to report
field intensity of such
cells.
This parameter
indicates whether to
allow UE to search
UTRAN adjacent cells
in the frame where
BSIC decoding is
needed. If yes, then
UE can use at most
25 frames for search
in 13 seconds.
0 ~ 7: corresponding
to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

303

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

level Offset

UTRAN/FDD,
UTRAN/TDD

per level.

Value range: 0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7
Adjacent cell
reporting signal
level Threshold

GSM 850, GSM 900,


GSM 1800, GSM 1900,
UTRAN/FDD,
UTRAN/TDD

0: always

Value range: 0, 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 7

1~6:
Corresponding to 6
~ 36 dB, 6dB per
level
7: Never

FIGURE 314 MODIFYING


PAR AMETERS 1)

UTR AN CELL CONTROL P ARAMETERS (GPRS

TABLE 103 MODIFYING UTR AN CELL CONTROL P ARAMETERS (GPRS


P AR AMETERS 1)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

PS offset which is
added when UE
reports rxlev value

Drop down list

This parameter defines


the added offset when
UE reports signal field
intensity.

Range: 0~2
Default: 0

0: 0 dB
1: 10 dB

2: Automatic,
determined by UE

304

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

PS measurement
reported by UE

Drop down list

This parameter indicates


that UE uses PACKET
MEASUREMENT REPORT
or PACKET ENHANCED
MEASUREMENT REPORT
message

Range: 0~1
Default: 0

PS number of same
frequency adjacent
cells in report

Drop down list

PS measurement
reporting rate of
adjacent cell

Drop down list

Range: 0~3
Default: 2

Range: 0~1
Default: 0

This parameter
describes the maximum
number of adjacent cells
in the same frequency
band of the serving cell,
in packet measurement
report or strongest cell
list.

0: Normal

1: Low

FDD property
PS class of reported
quantity of UTRAN
adjacent cell

Drop down list


Range: 0~1
Default: 0

0: RSCP, receiving
power
of
CPICH
scramble of UTRAN
cell at UE, the unit is
dBm;
1: Ec/No, ratio of the
receiving power to
thermal noise of CPICH
scramble of UTRAN cell,
the unit is dB.

PS maximum number
of UTRAN FDD
adjacent cell in
measurement report

Drop down list

PS multiband report
indication

Drop down list

Range: 0~3
Default: 2

This parameter indicates


the maximum number
of UTRAN/FDD adjacent
cells included in packet
measurement report or
strongest cell list.

Range: 0~3
Default: 0
TDD property

TDD multi report


(TS)

Drop down list


Range: 0~3
Default: 2

This parameter indicates


the maximum number
of UTRAN/TDD adjacent
cells in measurement
report or the strongest
cell list.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

305

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 315 MODIFYING UTR AN CELL CONTROL P ARAMETERS (GPRS


P AR AMETERS 2)

TABLE 104 MODIFYING UTR AN CELL CONTROL P ARAMETERS (GPRS


P AR AMETERS 2)

Parameter

Type and Range

PS UE report invalid
cell level allowed

Drop down list

No

Yes

When BCC is not


configured, NCC is
permitted for BSIC of
some GSM cells. This
parameter indicates
whether the system
allows UE to report
field intensity of such
cell.

YES: Allow UE to
report the field
intensity of NCC
permitted but BCC
invalid cells
NO: Do not Allow UE
to report the field
intensity of NCC
permitted but BCC
invalid cells
PS UE search UTRAN
adjacent cell in basic
decoding frame
indication

306

Drop down list

No

Yes

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

This parameter
indicates whether to
allow UE to search
UTRAN adjacent cells
in the frame where
BSIC decoding is
needed. If yes, then
UE can use at most

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range


25 frames for search
in 13 seconds.

Adjacent cell
reporting signal level
Offset

GSM 850, GSM


900, GSM 1800,
GSM 1900,
UTRAN/FDD,
UTRAN/TDD

0 ~ 7: corresponding
to 0 ~ 42 dB, 6dB
per level.

Value range: 0, 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Adjacent cell
reporting signal level
Threshold

GSM 850, GSM


900, GSM 1800,
GSM 1900,
UTRAN/FDD,
UTRAN/TDD
Value range: 0, 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

3. Click

0: always
1~6:
corresponding to 6
~ 36 dB, 6dB per
level
7: Never

to save modifications.

END OF STEPS
Result

UTRAN cell control parameters are successfully modified.

Modifying UTRAN Cell Handover


Control Parameters
Purpose

To modify UTRAN handover control parameters

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that cell is configured


and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.

Steps

To modify UTRAN handover control parameters, perform the


following steps:
1. Double-click UTRAN handover control1 as shown in Figure
316.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

307

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 316 MODIFYING UTR AN H ANDOVER CONTROL P AR AMETERS

2. Click
icon and then click Basic properties 1 tab and
modify the parameters by referring Figure 317, Figure 318
and Table 105, Table 106.
FIGURE 317 MODIFYING UTR AN H ANDOVER CONTROL P AR AMETERS
(BASIC PROPERTIES 1)

TABLE 105 MODIFYING UTR AN H ANDOVER CONTROL P AR AMETERS


(BASIC PROPERTIES 1)

308

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Character string:
1~40

SITE ID

Integer type

BTS ID

Integer type

UTRAN handover
control ID

Integer type

This parameter is a
unique identification of
UTRAN adjacent cell
handover object.

Punishment period
of UTRAN cell
when handover
failure

Drop down list

This parameter defines a


protection period to
prevent immediate
handover after handover
failure.

Slide window size


for calculating

Drop down list

Range: 1~255
Default: 7

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Description

Slide window size for


calculating Ec/No or

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Ec/No or RSCP
average value to
be zero

Range: 1~31

RSCP average value to


be zero

Number that
measurement
value allowed to
be zero

Drop down list

UTRAN handover

Drop down list

Default: 6

Range: 1~31
Default: 1

FDD/TDD
handover

Handover to
UTRAN first

According to GSM
specifications, MS can
report to BSS the
measurement data of at
most six adjacent cells
with strongest signal
strength. Thus the
measurement results
might not be
consecutive. For cells
whose signal strength is
less than -110 dBm, the
measurement data are
not reported. BSC marks
measurement data of
such adjacent cells as
zero.
This parameter indicates
the priority control of
UTRAN handover.

Not
Handover to
UTRAN first
Not allow to
Handover to
UTRAN
According to
MSC default
handover to
UTRAN first
According to
MSC, default
not
handover to
UTRAN first
According to
MSC, default
not allowed
to handover
to UTRAN.
Handover to
FDD
cell
should
be
performed;

This parameter indicates


the priority control of
FDD/TDD handover.

Handover to
TDD
cell

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

309

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

should
be
performed.

FIGURE 318 MODIFYING UTR AN HANDOVER CONTROL P AR AMETERS


(BASIC PROPERTIES 2)

TABLE 106 MODIFYING UTR AN H ANDOVER CONTROL P AR AMETERS (BASIC


PROPERTIES 2)

Parameter

Type and Range

Descriptions

Directed retry to
UTAN cell allowed

Drop down list

This parameter
determines if allow
directed retry to
UTRAN cell.

Inter system
handover supported

No

Yes

Drop down list

No

Yes

This parameter
indicates whether
intersystem
handover within BSC
is allowed. It applies
to both handover-in
and handover-out.

Handover from GSM to UTRAN

310

FDD RSCP

FDD Ec/No

TDD RSCP

Threshold

Integer Type:
0~63, default
value: 35

Integer Type:
0~49, default
value: 25

Integer Type:
0~63, default
value: 35

Value P

Integer Type:
1~20, default
value: 3

Integer Type:
1~20, default
value: 2

Integer Type:
1~20, default
value: 3

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter
Value N

Type and Range


Integer Type:
1~20, default
value: 4

3. Click

Descriptions

Integer Type:
1~20, default
value: 4

Integer Type:
1~20, default
value: 4

icon to save modifications.

END OF STEPS
Result

UTRAN cell-handover
modified.

control

parameters

are

successfully

External Cell Configuration


This section consists of the following topics:

Configuring GERAN External Cell

Configuring UTRAN External Cell

Configuring GERAN External Cell


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure GERAN external cell


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
successfully and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure GERAN external cell perform the following steps:
1. Right-click External cell config and then, click Create
GERAN external cell as shown in Figure 319.
FIGURE 319 CONFIGURING EXTERNAL CELL

2. Input User label in Create Basic Property dialog box, and


input the parameters as shown in Figure 320, by referring to
Table 107.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

311

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 320 CREATE GERAN EXTERNAL CELL DIALOG BOX

TABLE 107 GER AN EXTERNAL CELL PAR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Characters, numbers or combination of


both: 1~40

External 3G Cell ID

Integer type: 1 ~ 65535, default value: 1


Drop down list

Cell type

Umbrella cell, Macro Cell, Micro Cell, Micromicro Cell, Extended Cell
Default: Macro Cell

MCC

Integer type: 0 ~ 999, default value: 460

MNC

Integer type: 0 ~ 999, default value: 0


Drop down list

Frequency band

312

GSM900

EXT 900

DCS 1800

GSM 850

BCCH frequency

Integer type: 0~1023, default value: 1

Mobile Country
Code(MCC)

Integer type: 0 ~ 999, default value: 460

Mobile Network
Code(MNC)

Integer type: 0 ~ 999, default value: 0

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Type and Range

Location Area
Code(LAC)

Integer type: 1 ~ 65535

Cell Identity (C_ID)

Integer type: 0 ~ 65535

NCC

Integer type: 0~7

BCC

Integer type: 0~7


Drop down list

GPRS service
supported

3.

No

yes

Click OK to complete the process.

END OF THE STEPS


Result

GERAN external cell is configured successfully, for example NGS,


as shown in Figure 321.
FIGURE 321 CREATED GE R AN EXTERNAL CELL

Configuring UTRAN External Cell


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure UTRAN external cell


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
successfully and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure UTRAN external cell, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click External cell config and click Create UTRAN
external cell.
2. Input the parameters in UTRAN external cell dialog box as
shown in Figure 322, by referring to Table 108.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

313

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 322 CREATE UTRAN EXTERNAL CELL DIALOG BOX

TABLE 108 UTR AN EXTERNAL CELL PAR AMETERS

Parameter

Value

User label

Characters, numbers or
combination of both: 1~40

External
UTRAN ID

Integer type: 1 ~ 65535,


default value: 1

Description

Drop down list


UTRAN Cell
type

314

FDD

TDD

Mobile
Country
Code(MCC)

Integer type: 0 ~ 999,


default: 460

Mobile
Network
Code(MNC)

Integer type: 0 ~
999,default value: 0

Frequency

Integer type: 0~1023,


default value: 1

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Frequency range
depends on UTRAN
Cell type

Chapter 8 - Cell Configuration

Parameter

Value

Location
Area
Code(LAC)

Integer type: 1 ~ 65535,


default value: 1

RNC ID

Integer type: 0 ~ 4095,


default value: 0

Cell Identity
(C_ID)

Integer type: 0 ~ 65535,


default value: 0

Scrambling
Code

Integer type: 0 ~ 511,


default: 0
Drop down list

TX diversity
indication

No

Yes

Description

Main scramble code


of the 3G adjacent
cell
Whether to apply
transmit diversity to
the 3G adjacent cell

3. Click OK to configure UTRAN external cell.


END OF STEPS
Result

UTRAN external cell is successfully configured, for example


NGS1, as shown in Figure 323.
FIGURE 323 CREATED UTR AN EXTERNAL CELL

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

315

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

This page is intentionally blank.

316

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter

Alarm Parameters
Configuration
This chapter describes the configuration process of parameters
related to different alarms.

Configuring CLKG Alarm Parameters


Purpose

To configure CLKG board alarm parameters

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured


successfully and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.

Steps

To configure CLKG alarm parameters, perform the following


steps:
1. Right-click on Alarm parameters and then, click Create
CLKG alarm parameters as shown in Figure 324.
FIGURE 324 CONFIGURING CLKG AL ARM P AR AMETERS

2. Input User label and configure CLKG alarm parameters as


shown in Figure 325, by referring to Table 109.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

317

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FI G U R E 3 2 5 C L K G B O AR D AL AR M P AR AM E T E R S D I AL O G B O X

TABLE 109 CLKG BOARD ALARM P AR AMETERS

Parameters

Type and Range

User label

Character string: 1~40

Enable /Disable clock base

Drop down list

Yes

No

Default: Yes
Master clock base

User can select from drop-down list


depending on actual configuration.

Available clock Base List (Can be switched)


2Mbits0

318

Drop down list

Enable

Disable

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 9 - Alarm Parameters Configuration

Parameters

Type and Range


Default: Enable

2Mbits1

Drop down list

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
2MHz0

Drop down list

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
2MHz1

Drop down list

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
8KBase

Drop down list

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
8KGPS

Drop down list

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
8KUIM

Drop down list

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
PP2S

Drop down list

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable

3. Click OK to complete the process.


END OF STEPS
Result

CLKG board alarm parameters are successfully configured, as


shown in Figure 326.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

319

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 326 CONFIGURED CLKG BOARD ALARM P AR AMETERS

Configuring POWERB Alarm


Parameters
Purpose

To configure POWERB alarm parameters

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured


successfully and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.

Steps

To configure POWERB alarm parameters, perform the following


steps:
1. Right-click on Alarm parameters and then, click Create
POWERB alarm parameters as shown in Figure 327.
FIGURE 327 CREATING POWERB AL ARM P AR AMETERS

2. Input User label and configure Power board alarm


parameters as shown in Figure 328, by referring to Table 110.

320

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 9 - Alarm Parameters Configuration

FIGURE 328 POWERB ALARM P AR AMETERS DIALOG BOX

TABLE 110 POWERB ALARM P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Power Board Config


User label

Character string:
1~40

Unique user label


given to every site

Rack temperature
minimum (c)

Integer type: 0~10

Increased in step of
0.1

Rack temperature
maximum (c)

Integer type: 40~100

Increased in step of
0.1

Voltage (min)

Integer type: 36~45

Increased in step of
0.1

Voltage(max)

Integer type: 55~72

Increased in step of
0.1

Fans half/full
speed switch
temperature(c)

Integer type: 55~72

Increased in step of

0.1

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

321

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Fog sensor

Drop down list

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
Infrared sensor

Drop down list

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
House
temperature and
humidity sensor

Drop down list

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
House
temperature
max(c)

Integer type

House
temperature min
(c)

Integer type

House humidity
max(c)

Integer type

House humidity
min (c)

Integer type
Fan Config

No1 fans alarm

Drop down list

Sheilded

Unshaeilded

Default: Unsheilded
No2 fans alarm

Drop down list

Sheilded

Unshaeilded

Default: Sheilded
No3 fans alarm

Drop down list

Sheilded

Unshaeilded

Default: Sheilded
No4 fans alarm

Drop down list

Sheilded

Unshaeilded

Default: Sheilded

322

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 9 - Alarm Parameters Configuration

Door Access Config


No 1 door access
alarms

Drop down list

Sheilded

Unshaeilded

Default: Unsheilded
No 2 door access
alarms

Drop down list

Sheilded

Unshaeilded

Default: Unsheilded
No 3 door access
alarms

Drop down list

Sheilded

Unshaeilded

Default: Unsheilded
No 4 door access
alarms

Drop down list

Sheilded

Unshaeilded

Default: Unsheilded
No 5 door access
alarms

Drop down list

Sheilded

Unshaeilded

Default: Unsheilded
No 6 door access
alarms

Drop down list

Sheilded

Unshaeilded

Default: Unsheilded
Power Config
No 1 power alarm

Drop down list

Sheilded

Unshaeilded

Default: Unsheilded
No 1 power alarm

Drop down list

Sheilded

Unshaeilded

Default: Unsheilded

3. Click OK to configure power-board alarm parameters.


END OF STEPS

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

323

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Result

Power-board alarm parameters are successfully configured, as


shown in Figure 329.
FI G U R E 3 2 9 C O N F I G U R E D P O W E R B O AR D AL AR M P AR AM E T E R S

Configuring PSN Alarm Parameters


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To configure PSN alarm parameters


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To configure PSN alarm parameters, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on Alarm parameters and then, click Create
PSN alarm parameters as shown in Figure 330.
FI G U R E 3 3 0 C O N F I G U R I NG P S N AL AR M S P AR AM E T E R S

2. Input User label and configure parameters in PSN alarm


parameters dialog box as shown in Figure 331, by referring
to Table 111.

324

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 9 - Alarm Parameters Configuration

FI G U R E 3 3 1 P S N AL AR M P AR AM E T E R S D I AL O G B O X

TABLE 111 PSN AL ARM PAR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

User label

Character string: 1~40


Drop down list

Enable
/Disable
clock base

Yes

No

Default: Yes
Master clock
base

User can select from drop-down list depending on


actual configuration.
Default: 2Mbits0

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

325

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Drop down list


2Mbits0

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
Drop down list
2Mbits1

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
Drop down list
2MHz0

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
Drop down list
2MHz1

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
Drop down list
8KBase

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
Drop down list
8KGPS

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
Drop down list
8KUIM

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
Drop down list
PP2S

Enable

Disable

Default: Enable
Drop down list

Clock grade

Disable

Clock graee 2

Clock grade 3

Default: Clock grade 3

326

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 9 - Alarm Parameters Configuration

END OF STEPS
Result

PSN alarm parameters are configured, as shown in Figure 332.


FIGURE 332 CONFIGURED PSN AL ARM PAR AMETERS

Setting Dry Contact Alarm


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To set dry contact alarms


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To set dry contact alarm, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on Site rack and click Set dry contact alarm in
the popup menu, as in Figure 333.
FIGURE 333 SETTING DRY CONTACT AL ARM

2. Configure dry contact alarm parameters as shown in Figure


334, by referring to Table 112, and click OK.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

327

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 334 SET DRY CONTACT AL ARM DIALOG BOX

TABLE 112 DRY CONTACT ALARM P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Type and Range

Description

Drop down list


Dry contact
1~12

Set 0: report
alarm when
receive signal 0.
Set 1: report
alarm when
receive signal 1

END OF STEPS

Result

328

Dry contact alarm for the site is set successfully.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter

10

Data Operations
This chapter explains various data related operations performed
in configuration management.

Checking Global Data Validity


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To check validity of global data


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To check validity of global data, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on BSC managed element for example, xian
chang as shown in Figure 335 and click Config Data
managedelement Check validity of global data.
FIGURE 335 CHECKING VALIDITY OF GLOBAL DATA

2. A confirmation message appears to start global check, Click


OK.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

329

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

3. If the data configured in the particular BSC is correct then no


output message appears, otherwise the Operate Result, as
shown in Figure 336 appears.
Related
Information

If data validation is not successful, a notification message


showing causes of error is displayed as shown in Figure 336.
FIGURE 336 GLOBAL CHECK ERROR REPORT

END OF STEPS
Result

Data validated successfully.

Exporting Data
Purpose

To export data from another system

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that configuration set is


configured and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.

Steps

To export data from master configuration set, perform the


following steps:
1. Right-click on Master Config set and click Data Export in
the popup menu as shown in Figure 337.

330

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 10 - Data Operations

FIGURE 337 EXPORTING DATA FROM MASTER CONFIGURATION SET

2. Input File Name and save at the desired location.


3. Upon successful operation, system gives notification
message indicating successful export, click OK to complete
the process.
END OF STEPS
Result

Exporting data from master configuration set is performed


successfully.

Importing Data
Purpose

To import data from another location to master configuration set.

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that configuration set is


configured and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.

Steps

To import data to master configuration set, perform the


following steps:
1. Right-click on Master Config set and click Data Import in
the popup menu as shown in Figure 338.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

331

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 338 IMPORTING DAT A TO M ASTER CONFIGURATION SET

2. Browse the file to be imported and click Open in the Open


dialog box to import data.
END OF STEPS
Result

Import data
successfully.

to

master

configuration

set

is

performed

Searching
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To find managed object for user convenience


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To find an object, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on Master config set and click Find in the popup
menu as shown in Figure 339.

332

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 10 - Data Operations

FIGURE 339 FIND OPERATION

2. Click
icon as shown in Figure 340, and select MOC as
shown in Figure 341.
FIGURE 340 FIND OPERATION DIALOG BOX

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

333

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 341 SELECTING MOC

3. Click OK, as shown in Figure 341 and Figure 340.


Related
Information

User can select row under Find Result and click GO to view
BRCH parameters under BRCH0 as shown in Figure 342.
FIGURE 342 FIND OPERATION RESULT

END OF STEPS
Result

334

Object successfully found, as shown in Figure 343.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 10 - Data Operations

FIGURE 343 OUTPUT OF SEARCH OPERATION

Synchronizing Tables
Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To synchronize all tables


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally
To synchronize all tables, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click on GERAN sub network for example Shanghai,
and click Config Data management Synchronize all
tables in the popup menu, as shown in Figure 344.
FI G U R E 3 4 4 S Y N C H R O NI Z IN G AL L T AB L E S

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

335

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

2. A global check success message appears; click OK to confirm


the global check process.
3. Configure Synchronize all data dialog box parameters, as
shown in Figure 345, by referring to Table 113.
FI G U R E 3 4 5 S Y N C H R O NI Z IN G AL L T AB L E S D I AL O G B O X

TABLE 113 SYNCHRONIZING TABLES P AR AMETERS

Parameter

Description

Master To slave

User can select Yes or No depending on


actual configuration.

Save it

User can select yes or No depending on


actual configuration.

4. Upon successful operation system will give notification


message, click OK to confirm.
Related
Information

Using this operation all data that the user configures, some data
in client is stored in the server database; this data is not
relevant to the NE. Synchronize all tables operation is used to
output the entire server database to the NE. If NE has already
some data, that will be cleared.
END OF STEPS

Result

Synchronizing all tables is done successfully.

Synchronizing Modified Tables


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To synchronize the modified tables


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To synchronize modified tables, perform the following steps:
1. Right-click
on
GERAN
sub
network
for
example
GPRS_BTS30, and click Config Data management
Synchronize modified tables in the popup menu, as
shown in Figure 346.

336

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 10 - Data Operations

FIGURE 346 SYNCHRONIZING MODIFIED TABLES

2. Click OK in global check pass notification-message to


continue the process.
3. User can select Yes or No in Master to slave and Save it
as shown in Figure 347. Click OK.
FIGURE 347 SYNCHRONIZING MODIFIED TABLES DIALOG BOX

4. Upon successful operation, system shows notification


message. Otherwise, an unsuccessful synchronization
notification message appears.
END OF STEPS
Result

Synchronizing modified tables is done successfully.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

337

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Comparing MO
Purpose
Prerequisite
Steps

To compare Managed Object (MO)


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To compare MO, perform the following steps:
In the following section, comparing BTS node is taken as an
example.
1. Right-click on BS30 node and then, click MO Compare
Source MO as shown in Figure 348.
FIGURE 348 SELECTING SOURCE MO

2. Right-click on bts2 and then, click MO Compare


Destination MO as shown in Figure 349.
FIGURE 349 SELECTING DESTINATION MO

END OF STEPS
Result

338

MO compared successfully as shown in Figure 350.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 10 - Data Operations

FIGURE 350 COMPARED MO

Comparing Sub Tree


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To compare sub tree


Prior to performing this task, make sure that BSC is configured
and NetNumenM32 client is running normally.
To compare sub tree, perform the following steps:
Sub tree comparison of BTS node is taken as example in the
following section.
1. Right-click on bs21_1 and then, click Subtree Compare
Source Subtree in the popup menu, as shown in Figure 351.
FIGURE 351 SELECTING SOURCE SUBTREE

2. Right-click on B8112 and then, click Subtree Compare


Destination Subtree, as shown in Figure 352.
FIGURE 352 SELECTING DESTINATION

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

339

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

3. Click
icon to display the detailed comparison as shown in
Figure 353.
FIGURE 353 COMPARED SUBTREE

END OF STEPS
Result

Sub tree compared successfully, as shown in Figure 353.

Duplicating Sub Tree


Purpose
Prerequisites
Steps

To duplicate source sub tree information


Prior to performing this task make sure that NetNumenM32
client is running normally.
To duplicate sub tree perform the following steps:
Duplicating sub tree in slave configuration set is considered as
an example.
1. Right-click BSC Function, and click Subtree Duplicate
Subtree Copy as shown in Figure 354.

340

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 10 - Data Operations

FIGURE 354 COPYING SUB TREE

4. Right-click on the slave configuration set and then, click


Subtree Duplicate Subtree Paste, as shown in Figure
355. An interface as shown in Figure 356 appears; click OK
to complete the process.
FIGURE 355 P ASTING SUB TREE

FIGURE 356 SUB TREE DUPLICATE DIALOG BOX

END OF STEPS
Result

The sub tree information is duplicated successfully, as shown in


Figure 357.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

341

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 357 SUB TREE DUPLICATION RESULT

Creating Slave Configuration Set


Purpose

To create slave configuration set, as a data backup of master


configuration set for user convenience and safety.

Prerequisites

Prior to performing this task, make sure that managed element


is created successfully.

Steps

To create slave configuration set, perform the following steps:


1. Right-click on BSC managed element, and click Create
Config set in the popup menu, as shown in Figure 358.

342

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Chapter 10 - Data Operations

FIGURE 358 CREATING CONFIGURATION SET

2. Input the information in the Create config set dialog box, as


shown in Figure 359, and click OK.
FIGURE 359 CREATE CONFIG SET DIALOG BOX

END OF STEPS
Result

Slave configuration set is successfully created. The created slave


configuration for example, shanghai slave is as shown in
Figure 360.

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

343

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

FIGURE 360 CREATED SLAVE CONFIGURATION SET

Related
Information

icon to switch from master configuration


1. User can click
to slave and vice versa as shown in Figure 361.
symbol although its
2. Master configuration set appears with
name is not changing that is, if Shanghai slave appears
symbol it is acting as master.
with
FIGURE 361 SWITCHING BETWEEN M ASTER AND SLAVE

344

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Appendix

Abbevreviations
Abbreviation

Full Name

A
Abis

A-bis Interface

APB

ATM Process Board

APBE

Iu interface access board

AMP

Application Manage Process

AMR

Adaptive Multi Rate

AMREN

Adaptive Multi Rate Encoding

AMRFR

Adaptive Multi Rate Full Rate

AMRHR

Adaptive Multi Rate Half Rate

ANSI

American National Standards Institute

B
BCSN

Backplane of Circuit Switch Network

BPSN

Back Plane of Packet Switching Network

BCCH

Broadcast Control Channel

BUSN

Backplane of Universal Switch Network

BCTC

Backplane of Control Centre

BIE

Base station Interface Equipment

BIPP

Abis Interface Peripheral Processor

BIU

Abis Interface Unit

BNET

Backplane of Network Layer

BOSN

Bit Oriented Switching Network

BPCU

Packet Control Unit Shelf

BRCH

Broadcast Channel

BRP

BSSGP RLC/MAC Protocol

BSC

Base Station Controller

BSMU

Sub-multiplexing Interface Unit

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

345

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Abbreviation

Full Name

BSS

Base Station Subsystem

BSSAP

Base Station Subsystem Application Part

BSSGP

Base Station Subsystem GPRS Protocol

BTS

Base Transceiver Station

BVC

BSSGP Virtual Connection

C
CHUB

Control Hub

CI

Cell Identity

CLKG

Clock Generator board

CMP

Control Main Processor

COMM

Communication Board

D
DTB

Digital Trunk Board

DPC

Destination Point Code

DRT

Dual Rate Transcoder

DSNI

Digital Switch Network Interface

DSP

Digital Signal Processor

DTE

Data Terminal Equipment

E
E1

European Standard for Digital Transmission

EDRT

Enhanced DRT

EFR

Enhanced Full Rate

EFREN

Enhanced Full Rate Encoding

EGSM

Extended GSM

ETSI

European
Institute

Telecommunications

Standards

F
FACCH/F

Fast Associated Control Channel Full Rate

FACHH/H

Fast Associated Control Channel Half Rate

FE

Fast Ethernet

FR

Full Rate

FRP

Frame Relay Protocol

FSMU

Far Sub-multiplexing Unit

FSPP

Far Sub-multiplexing Peripheral Processor

FTP

File Transfer Protocol.

FUC

Frame Unit Controller

346

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Appendix A - Abbevreviations

Abbreviation

Full Name

Gb

Gb Interface

GERAN

GSM EDGE radio access network

GIPP

Gb Interface Peripheral Processor

GIU

GPRS Interface Unit

GPP

General Peripheral Processor

GLI

GE Line Interface board

GPRS

General Packet Radio Service

GSM

Global System for Mobile communication

GUP

Abis processing board

H
HDLC

High-level Data Link Control

HMS

High Megabit Switch

HR

Half Rate

HREN

Half Rate Encoding

HSN

Hopping Sequence Number

HW

High Way

I
IMSI

International Mobile Subscriber Identity

IP

Internet Protocol

IPI

IP Abis interface access board

ISDN

Integrated Services Digital Network

ISUP

Integrated Services User Part

IMAB

Iu interface access board

ITU

International Telecommunications Union

L
LAC

Location Area Code

LAPD

Link Access Protocol on D-Channel

LMT

Local Maintenance Terminal

M
MCC

Mobile Country Code

MGW

Media Gateway

MMI

Man Machine Interface

MMIC

Multi-server Network Interface Card

MNC

Mobile Net Code

MPB

Main Processor Board

MS

Mobile Station

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

347

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Abbreviation

Full Name

MSC

Mobile Switching Center

MSS

Mobile Switching System

MTP

Message Transfer Part

M3UA

MTP 3 User Application Part

N
NC

Network Control

NS

Network Service

NSE

Network Service Entity

NSEI

Network Service Entity Identifier

NSMU

Near Sub-multiplexing Unit

NSPP

Near Sub-multiplexing Peripheral Processor

NSVC

Network Service Virtual Connection

NSVCI

Network Service Virtual Connection Identifier

O
OMP

Operation & Maintenance Processor board

OMCR

Operation & Maintenance Center Radio

OPC

Operating Point Code

OSI

Open System Interconnection

P
PDP

Packet Data Protocol

R
RPB

Router Protocol Process Board

RCKG2

Rare Board 2 of CLKG

RCHB

Rare Board of CHB

RPSN

Rare Board of PSN

348

SACCH

Slow Associated Control Channel

SCCP

Signaling Connection Control Part

SDCCH

Stand-alone Dedicated Control Channel

SLC

Signaling Link Code

SGSN

Serving GPRS Support Node.

SDTB

Sonnet Digital Trunk Board

SIO

Service Information Octet

SPB

Signaling Process Board

SMLC

Serving Mobile Location Center

SMS

Short Message Service

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Appendix A - Abbevreviations

Abbreviation

Full Name

SMP

Signaling Main Processor

SSF

Service Switching Function

SS7

Signaling System 7

SSN

Sub System Number

STD

Subscriber Trunk Dialing

SUA

SCCP-User Adaptation SUA.

SYCK

Synchronous Clock Board

T
TFI

TDM Fiber Interface

TC

Transcoder

TSNB

TDM Switch Network Board

TCH/F

Traffic Channel Full Rate

TCH/H

Traffic Channel Half Rate

TCP

Transmission Control Protocol

TCPP

Transcoder Unit Peripheral Processor

TCU

Transcoder and Rate Adaptation Unit

TDMA

Time Division Multiple Access

TIC

Trunk Interface Circuit

TRAU

Transcoder and Rate Adaptor Unit

TRX

Transceiver

TS

Time Slot

U
UIM

Universal Interface Module

UIMU

Universal Interface board

UIMT

Universal Interface board

UIMC

Universal Interface board

UPPB

User Plane Processing Board

UTRAN

UMTS terrestrial radio access network.

V
VTD

Voice Transcoder Card

VTCD

Voice Transcoder Card (DSP)

W
WPB

Wireless Protocol Process Board

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

349

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

This page is intentionally blank.

350

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Appendix

Figures

Figure 1 NetNumenM32 Client Login Dialog Box.................2


Figure 2 NetNumenM32 Main Interface.............................2
Figure 3 Login Failure Message ..........................................3
Figure 4 Start Creating NE Agent .......................................3
Figure 5 Create NE Agent (Basic Attributes).........................4
Figure 6 Create NE Agent (Extended Attributes) ...................4
Figure 7 Created NE Agent ................................................6
Figure 8 Starting Network Element .....................................7
Figure 9 NE Starting Failure Message Box............................7
Figure 10 Accessing Configuration Management ....................8
Figure 11 Configuration Management Pane ..........................8
Figure 12 Locking Screen ..................................................9
Figure 13 Confirmation Message for Locking Screen ..............9
Figure 14 Enabling System Time Desplay .......................... 10
Figure 15 Show System Time Window............................... 10
Figure 16 Showing/Hiding Toolbar .................................... 11
Figure 17 Viewing System Information (About) .................. 12
Figure 18 Viewing System Information (Information) .......... 12
Figure 19 Showing/Hiding Status Bar................................ 13
Figure 20 Showing/Hiding Message Area ........................... 14
Figure 21 Logging out from NetNumenM32 ..................... 15
Figure 22 Confirmation Message to Logout from
NetNumenM32 .............................................................. 15
Figure 23 Exit from NetNumenM32 ................................ 16
Figure 24 Confirmation Message Box to Exit NetNumenM32
..................................................................................... 16

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

351

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Figure 25 Entering the Option Setting for Style Setup ......... 17


Figure 26 Option Settings (Selecting the Style for different
Users) ............................................................................ 18
Figure 27 Option Settings (Login User) ............................. 18
Figure 28 Entering Print Setup ......................................... 19
Figure 29 Print Setup Dialog Box...................................... 20
Figure 30 Menu bar Switchover........................................ 21
Figure 31 Fault Management Pane after Dynamic Switchover21
Figure 32 Closing Current View ........................................ 22
Figure 33 Selecting Close All Views................................... 23
Figure 34 All Operation Views Closed ................................ 23
Figure 35 Creating GERAN Sub Network............................ 25
Figure 36 Create GERAN Sub Network .............................. 26
Figure 37 Created GERAN Sub Network............................. 26
Figure 38 Deleting GERAN Sub Network ............................ 27
Figure 39 Deleting GERAN Sub Network Confirmation Message
..................................................................................... 27
Figure 40 Creating BSC Managed Elements........................ 28
Figure 41 Creating BSC Managed Elements........................ 29
Figure 42 Created Managed Element ................................ 30
Figure 43 Creating BSC Functions .................................... 31
Figure 44 Basic Properties Dialog box ............................... 32
Figure 45 Radio Basic Property Parameters........................ 35
Figure 46 Others Parameters ........................................... 38
Figure 47 GPRS Property 1 Parameters ............................. 41
Figure 48 GPRS Property2 Interface ................................. 44
Figure 49 GPRS Timer Parameter Interface........................ 46
Figure 50 GPRS Maximum Retrying Times ......................... 49
Figure 51 Timer 1 paremeter Interface ............................. 51
Figure 52 Interface for Timer 2 Parameters ....................... 54
Figure 53 - Interface of BVC Flow Control Parameters ........... 58
Figure 54 Interface of EDGE Property Parameters............... 61
Figure 55 Created BSC Function....................................... 63
Figure 56 Creating BSC Rack ........................................... 65
Figure 57 Selecting Rack No and Type .............................. 66
Figure 58 BSC Standard Rack .......................................... 66
Figure 59 Creating BSC Rack By Template......................... 67

352

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

AppendixB - Figures

Figure 60 Create BSC Rack by Template ........................... 68


Figure 61 Creating Shelf ................................................. 69
Figure 62 Creating Control Shelf Dialog Box....................... 69
Figure 63 Configuring OMP Board (Basic Information) ......... 70
Figure 64 Configuring OMP Board (Module Configuration
Information) .................................................................... 71
Figure 65 OMP Boards in Control Shelf after Configuration ... 71
Figure 66 Creating UIMC Board........................................ 72
Figure 67 Configuring UIMC Board (Basic Information) ........ 73
Figure 68 Appearance UIMC Board in the Control shelf ........ 73
Figure 69 Creating CMP Board ......................................... 74
Figure 70 Configuring CMP Board (Basic Information) ......... 74
Figure 71 Configuring CMP Board (Module Configuration
Information) .................................................................... 75
Figure 72 Appearance of CMP Board in Control Shelf ........... 75
Figure 73 Creating CLKG Board........................................ 75
Figure 74 Configuring CLKG Board (Basic Information) ........ 76
Figure 75 Appearance of CLKG borad in Control Shelf.......... 76
Figure 76 Creating CHUB Board ....................................... 77
Figure 77 Configuring CHUB Board (Basic Information) ....... 77
Figure 78 Appearance of CHUB borad in Control Shelf ......... 78
Figure 79 Creating Shelf ................................................. 78
Figure 80 Creating Shelf Dialog Box.................................. 79
Figure 81 Creating Board ................................................ 81
Figure 82 Configuring UIMU Board (Basic Information) ........ 82
Figure 83 Configuring UIMU Board (Board Connection
Information) .................................................................... 82
Figure 84 Appearance of UIMU Board in Resource Shelf....... 82
Figure 85 Configuring SPB Board (Basic Information) .......... 83
Figure 86 Configuring SPB Board (PCM Information) ........... 84
Figure 87 Appearience of SPB board In Resource Shelf ........ 84
Figure 88 Configuring DRTB Board (Basic Information)........ 85
Figure 89 Configuring DRTB Board (DSP Information) ......... 85
Figure 90 Appearance of DRTB Board in Resource Shelf....... 86
Figure 91 Configuring LAPD Board .................................... 87
Figure 92 Configuring LAPD Board (Basic Information) ........ 87
Figure 93 Configuring LAPD Board (PCM Information) ......... 88

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

353

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Figure 94 Appearance of LAPD Board in Resource Shelf ....... 88


Figure 95 Configuring BIPB Board (Basic Information)......... 89
Figure 96 Configuring BIPB Board (DSP Information) .......... 90
Figure 97 Appearance of BIPB Board in Resource Shelf........ 90
Figure 98 Configuring DTB Board ..................................... 91
Figure 99 Configuring DTB Board (Basic Information).......... 91
Figure 100 Configuring DTB Board (PCM Information) ......... 92
Figure 101 Configuring DTB Board (Changing Frame Mode) . 93
Figure 102 Appearance of DTB Board in resource Shelf ........ 93
Figure 103 Creating a UIMC Board ................................... 94
Figure 104 Selecting the Basic Properties for UIMC Board .... 95
Figure 105 Appearance of UIMC Board in Switching Shelf .... 95
Figure 106 Configuring Basic Information about PSN Board.. 96
Figure 107 Appearance of PSN Board in Switching Shelf ...... 97
Figure 108 Configuring GLIQV Board (Board Connection
Information) .................................................................... 97
Figure 109 Configured BSC Rack ...................................... 98
Figure 110 Deleting BSC Board ........................................ 99
Figure 111 Board Property View ..................................... 100
Figure 112 Modifying Board CPU Information ................... 101
Figure 113 Configuring Local Office ................................ 103
Figure 114 Create Local Office Dialog box........................ 104
Figure 115 Create Local No.7 SSN Dialog Box .................. 106
Figure 116 Configuring Adjacent Office ........................... 107
Figure 117 Configuring Adjacent Office (Alternate Method) 107
Figure 118 Create Adjacent Office Dialog Box .................. 107
Figure 119 Configuring Adjacent No.7SSN ....................... 110
Figure 120 Create Adjacent No.7SSN.............................. 110
Figure 121 Configured Adjacent No. 7 SSN ...................... 111
Figure 122 Creating No.7 PCM ....................................... 111
Figure 123 Configured No.7PCM..................................... 112
Figure 124 Configuring NO 7 Link Set ............................. 112
Figure 125 Creating No.7 Link Set .................................. 113
Figure 126 Configured No 7 Link Set .............................. 113
Figure 127 Creating No.7 Link ....................................... 114
Figure 128 Configuring No.7 Link Monitor ........................ 115
Figure 129 Create No.7 Link Monitor Dialog Box ............... 116

354

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

AppendixB - Figures

Figure 130 Creating No. 7 Route .................................... 118


Figure 131 Creating NO. 7 Office.................................... 119
Figure 132 Configuring AS ............................................ 120
Figure 133 Create AS Dialog box (Basic Config) ............... 120
Figure 134 Create AS Dialog Box (ASP ID) ...................... 122
Figure 135 Configuring Office Guide ............................... 124
Figure 136 Configuring Office Guide (Local office config..... 125
Figure 137 Configuring Office Guide (Adjacent Office) ....... 126
Figure 138 Office Guide Configuration (N7PCM)................ 127
Figure 139 Office Guide Configuration (LOCN7SSN) .......... 128
Figure 140 Office Guide Configuration (Signal Link Set) ..... 128
Figure 141 Office Guide Configuration (Signal Link) .......... 129
Figure 142 Office Guide Configuration (Signal Route) ........ 129
Figure 143 Office Guide Configuration (No. 7 Office) ......... 130
Figure 144 Creating Application Server Process ................ 131
Figure 145 - Create ASP (ASP Basic Configuration).............. 131
Figure 146 Creating ASP (ASP Other Config) .................... 132
Figure 147 - Create ASP (IP Configuration) ........................ 133
Figure 148 Create ASP (ASP Configuration) ..................... 134
Figure 149 Configured ASP............................................ 135
Figure 150 Configuring M3UA ........................................ 135
Figure 151 Configured M3UA ......................................... 137
Figure 152 Configuring SUA .......................................... 137
Figure 153 Configured SUA ........................................... 138
Figure 154 Configuring NSE........................................... 139
Figure 155 Configuring NSE Dialog Box ........................... 140
Figure 156 Configured NSE ........................................... 140
Figure 157 Configuring BRCH ........................................ 140
Figure 158 Create BRCH Dialog Box................................ 141
Figure 159 Configured BRCH ......................................... 142
Figure 160 Configuring NSVC Dialog Box ......................... 143
Figure 161 NSVC Create Interface .................................. 143
Figure 162 Configured NSVC ......................................... 144
Figure 163 Creating Site ............................................... 146
Figure 164 Create Site Dialog Box .................................. 146
Figure 165 Creating Site ............................................... 148

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

355

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Figure 166 Configuring B8018 ....................................... 149


Figure 167 Creating Site Rack ....................................... 150
Figure 168 Create Site Rack Dialog Box .......................... 150
Figure 169 B8018 Rack View ......................................... 150
Figure 170 Creating B8018 Shelf.................................... 151
Figure 171 Creating B8018 Shelf (Confirmation Message).. 151
Figure 172 Created Shelf of B8018 ................................. 151
Figure 173 Configuring PDM Panel.................................. 152
Figure 174 Create PDM Panel Message Box...................... 152
Figure 175 Configured PDM Panel................................... 152
Figure 176 Configuring CMB Panel.................................. 153
Figure 177 Creating CMB Panel (PCM No.) ....................... 154
Figure 178 PCM Lines ................................................... 154
Figure 179 Creating CMB Panel (TS No.) - 1 .................... 155
Figure 180 Creating CMB Panel (TS No.) - 2 .................... 155
Figure 181 Configuring CMB Panel.................................. 156
Figure 182 Configuring Further CMB Panel....................... 156
Figure 183 Creating EIB Panel ....................................... 157
Figure 184 Create Panel Dialog Box (EIB Panel) ............... 157
Figure 185 Configuring CDU Panel .................................. 157
Figure 186 Configuring CDU Panel Dialog Box .................. 158
Figure 187 Create DTRU Panel Dialog box ....................... 160
Figure 188 Configuring CEU Panel .................................. 161
Figure 189 Configuring CEU Panel (Selecting Panel Type) .. 161
Figure 190 B8018 Configured Rack................................. 162
Figure 191 Configuring B8122 ....................................... 163
Figure 192 Configuring CDU .......................................... 163
Figure 193 Configured B8112 ........................................ 164
Figure 194 Configuring M8202 ....................................... 165
Figure 195 Configuring M8202 Common Shelf.................. 165
Figure 196 M8202 Configured Rack ................................ 166
Figure 197 Configured M8206 BTS ................................. 168
Figure 198 Configuring BS20 ......................................... 169
Figure 199 Creating CMM Panel (PCM No.) ...................... 170
Figure 200 PCM Lines ................................................... 170
Figure 201 Creating CMM Panel (TS No) .......................... 171

356

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

AppendixB - Figures

Figure 202 Configuring TRM Panel (Basic Info) ................. 172


Figure 203 Configuring TRM Panel (MUL HYC Connect) ...... 172
Figure 204 Configured BS20 .......................................... 173
Figure 205 Configured TRME Panel ................................. 174
Figure 206 Configuring STRU......................................... 174
Figure 207 Configuring BS21 (V2.0) ............................... 175
Figure 208 Configured BS21 (V2.0) Rack......................... 175
Figure 209 Configuring BS30 V1.2.................................. 176
Figure 210 Configuring BS30 Main Shelf.......................... 177
Figure 211 Configured BS30 (V1.2) ................................ 177
Figure 212 Configuring BS30 ......................................... 178
Figure 213 Configuring BS30 Shelf ................................. 178
Figure 214 Configuring BS30 Panels ............................... 178
Figure 215 Configured BS30 Rack .................................. 179
Figure 216 Creating BS21 Panel ..................................... 180
Figure 217 Configured BS21 Rack .................................. 181
Figure 218 Configuring OB 06........................................ 182
Figure 219 Configuring OB06 (Creating Site Rack) ............ 182
Figure 220 Configuring OB06 Site Rack ........................... 183
Figure 221 Configuring OB06 Common Shelf.................... 183
Figure 222 Configured OB06 Site ................................... 184
Figure 223 Creating Site By Template ............................. 185
Figure 224 Configuring Site By Template........................ 185
Figure 225 Configuring Site By Template (CMM Configuration)
................................................................................... 186
Figure 226 Configuring Site By Template (Radio Configuration)
................................................................................... 187
Figure 227 Notification Message..................................... 187
Figure 228 Configured B8018 Site .................................. 188
Figure 229 Deleting Site ............................................... 188
Figure 230 Deleting Site Confirmation Message ............... 189
Figure 231 Configuring IP ............................................. 191
Figure 232 Configuring IP (Select Interface Information) ... 192
Figure 233 Configuring IP (Create Interface).................... 192
Figure 234 Configured Interface..................................... 193
Figure 235 Configured Interface..................................... 193
Figure 236 Selecting Inventory Unit Configuration ............ 194

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

357

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Figure 237 Create Inventory Unit ................................... 195


Figure 238 Configuring Cell ........................................... 198
Figure 239 Create Cell (Basic Parameters 1) .................... 199
Figure 240 Create CELL (Basic Parameters 2) .................. 203
Figure 241 Basic Parameters 3, interface ........................ 205
Figure 242 Optional Parameters Interface ....................... 206
Figure 243 Cell Selection Parameters Interface ................ 209
Figure 244 System Parameters Interface......................... 212
Figure 245 AMR Half MethodParameters Interface ............ 214
Figure 246 AMR Full Method Parameters ......................... 216
Figure 247 Cell Optional Parameters Interface ................. 219
Figure 248 Cell Others Parameters ................................. 220
Figure 249 Service Process and Additional Parameters
Interface ....................................................................... 223
Figure 250 GPRS Basic Parameters................................. 226
Figure 251 GPRS Power Control Parameters Interface ....... 228
Figure 252 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters Interface..... 229
Figure 253 GPRS Cell Channel Parameters Interface ......... 233
Figure 254 GPRS Other Parameters 1 Interface ................ 237
Figure 255 GPRS Other Parameters 2 Interface ................ 240
Figure 256 GPRS NC Survey Parameters Interface ............ 243
Figure 257 GPRS Cell Optional Parameters ...................... 246
Figure 258 Configuring EDGE Parameters ........................ 248
Figure 259 Configuring BCCH TRX .................................. 251
Figure 260 Configuring BCCH (TRX Frequency Info) .......... 251
Figure 261 Configuring BCCH TRX (Channel Info) ............. 253
Figure 262 Configured BCCH TRX ................................... 255
Figure 263 Configuring Non-BCCH TRX (Frequency Information)
................................................................................... 255
Figure 264 Configuring Non-BCCH TRX Info (Not Supporting
Frequency HOPPING) ...................................................... 256
Figure 265 Configuring Non-BCCH TRX (Channel Info) ...... 257
Figure 266 Configured Non-BCCH TRX ............................ 258
Figure 267 Configuring Frequency Hopping System .......... 259
Figure 268 ARFCN List In Cell Basic Parameters ............... 259
Figure 269 Creating Frequency Hopping System Dialog Box 260
Figure 270 Configured Frequency Hopping System ........... 261

358

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

AppendixB - Figures

Figure 271 Selecting Adjacent Cell Reselection ................. 261


Figure 272 Configuring Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters
................................................................................... 262
Figure 273 Selecting Adjacent Reselection Cell ................. 263
Figure 274 Configured Adjacent Reselection Cell............... 263
Figure 275 Creating Adjacent Cell handover..................... 264
Figure 276 Configuring Adjacent Cell Handover ................ 265
Figure 277 Selecting Adjacent Handover Cell ................... 268
Figure 278 Configured Adjacent Cell Handover ................. 269
Figure 279 Creating Adjacent Handover and Reselection Cell
................................................................................... 269
Figure 280 Configuring Adjacent Cell Handover And
Reselection.................................................................... 270
Figure 281 Selecting Adjacent Cell Handover And Reselection
Cell .............................................................................. 273
Figure 282 Configured Adjacent Cell Handover And Reselection
Cell .............................................................................. 273
Figure 283 Configuring Adjacent Interference Cell ............ 274
Figure 284 Create Adjacent Interference Cell Dialog Box ... 275
Figure 285 Selecting Adjacent Interference Cell................ 275
Figure 286 Configured Adjacent Interference Cell ............. 276
Figure 287 Modifying Cell Power Control Parameters ......... 276
Figure 288 Modifying Power Control Parameters (Power Control)
................................................................................... 277
Figure 289 Modifying Power control Parameters (Power Survey)
................................................................................... 278
Figure 290 Modifying Power Control Parameters (Power Adjust
Threshold)..................................................................... 279
Figure 291 Modifying Power Control Parametrs (Others) .... 280
Figure 292 Modifying Cell Handover Control Parameters .... 282
Figure 293 Modifying Handover Control Parameters (Handover
Control) ........................................................................ 283
Figure 294 Modifying Handover Control Parameters (Others)
................................................................................... 285
Figure 295 Modifying Handover Control Parameters (Handover
Arithmetic) .................................................................... 286
Figure 296 Modifying Handover Control Parameters (Sub Cell
Parameters) .................................................................. 288
Figure 297 Modifying Handover Control Parameters (Handover
Pretreatment) ................................................................ 289

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

359

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Figure 298 Modifying Handover Control Parameters (Handover


Level) ........................................................................... 290
Figure 299 Modifying Handover Control Parameters (Handover
Condition) ..................................................................... 291
Figure 300 Creating UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection ....... 293
Figure 301 Configuring UTRAN Adjacent Cell Reselection ... 294
Figure 302 Selecting UTRAN Adjacent Reselection Cell ...... 294
Figure 303 Configured UTRAN Adjacent Reselection Cell .... 295
Figure 304 Configuring UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover...... 295
Figure 305 Create UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Dialog Box
................................................................................... 296
Figure 306 Selecting UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Cell... 296
Figure 307 Configured UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover ...... 297
Figure 308 Configuring UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and
Reselection.................................................................... 297
Figure 309 Selecting UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and
Reselection Cell.............................................................. 298
Figure 310 Configured UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover And
Reselection.................................................................... 299
Figure 311 Modifying UTRAN Cell Control parameters........ 299
Figure 312 Modifying UTRAN Cell Control Parameters (Basic
Parameters 1)................................................................ 300
Figure 313 Modifying UTRAN Cell Control Parameters (Basic
Properties 2) ................................................................. 302
Figure 314 Modifying UTRAN Cell Control Parameters (GPRS
parameters 1)................................................................ 304
Figure 315 Modifying UTRAN Cell Control Parameters (GPRS
Parameters 2)................................................................ 306
Figure 316 Modifying UTRAN Handover Control Parameters 308
Figure 317 Modifying UTRAN handover Control Parameters
(Basic Properties 1) ........................................................ 308
Figure 318 Modifying UTRAN handover Control Parameters
(Basic Properties 2) ........................................................ 310
Figure 319 Configuring External Cell ............................... 311
Figure 320 Create GERAN EXTERNAL Cell Dialog Box ........ 312
Figure 321 Created GERAN External Cell ......................... 313
Figure 322 Create UTRAN External Cell Dialog Box ........... 314
Figure 323 Created UTRAN External Cell ......................... 315
Figure 324 Configuring CLKG Alarm Parameters ............... 317
Figure 325 CLKG Board Alarm Parameters Dialog Box ....... 318

360

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

AppendixB - Figures

Figure 326 Configured CLKG Board Alarm Parameters ....... 320


Figure 327 Creating POWERB Alarm Parameters............... 320
Figure 328 POWERB Alarm Parameters Dialog Box............ 321
Figure 329 Configured Power Board Alarm Parameters ...... 324
Figure 330 Configuring PSN Alarms Parameters................ 324
Figure 331 PSN Alarm Parameters Dialog Box .................. 325
Figure 332 Configured PSN Alarm Parameters .................. 327
Figure 333 Setting Dry Contact Alarm............................. 327
Figure 334 Set Dry Contact Alarm Dialog Box .................. 328
Figure 335 Checking Validity of Global Data..................... 329
Figure 336 Global Check Error Report ............................. 330
Figure 337 Exporting Data from Master Configuration Set .. 331
Figure 338 Importing Data to Master Configuration Set ..... 331
Figure 339 Find Operation............................................. 331
Figure 340 Find Operation Dialog Box ............................. 331
Figure 341 Selecting MOC ............................................. 331
Figure 342 Find Operation Result ................................... 331
Figure 343 Output of Search Operation ........................... 331
Figure 344 Synchronizing All Tables................................ 331
Figure 345 Synchronizing All Tables Dialog Box ................ 331
Figure 346 Synchronizing Modified Tables ....................... 331
Figure 347 Synchronizing Modified Tables Dialog Box ........ 331
Figure 348 Selecting Source MO..................................... 331
Figure 349 Selecting Destination MO .............................. 331
Figure 350 Compared MO ............................................. 331
Figure 351 Selecting Source Subtree .............................. 331
Figure 352 Selecting Destination .................................... 331
Figure 353 Compared Subtree ....................................... 331
Figure 354 Copying Sub Tree......................................... 331
Figure 355 Pasting Sub Tree.......................................... 331
Figure 356 Sub Tree Duplicate Dialog Box ....................... 331
Figure 357 Sub Tree Duplication Result ........................... 331
Figure 358 Creating Configuration Set ............................ 331
Figure 359 Create Config Set Dialog box ......................... 331
Figure 360 Created Slave Configuration Set ..................... 331
Figure 361 Switching Between Master and Slave ............... 331

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

361

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

This page is intentionally blank

362

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Tables
Table 1 Manual Summary ................................................ xi
Table 2 Typographical Conventions ....................................xiii
Table 3 Mouse Operation Conventions ................................xiii
Table 4 Description of Create NE Agent Parameters ..............5
Table 5 GERAN Sub Network Parameters........................... 26
Table 6 BSC Managed Element Parameters ......................... 29
Table 7 Basic Properties Parameters ................................. 32
Table 8 Description of Radio Basic Property Parameters....... 35
Table 9 Description of Others Parameters .......................... 38
Table 10 GPRS Properties 1 Parameters ............................ 41
Table 11 GPRS Property2 Parameters ............................... 44
Table 12 GPRS Timer Parameters ..................................... 46
Table 13 GPRS Maximum Retrying Times Parameters.......... 50
Table 14 Timer 1 Parameters Description .......................... 51
Table 15 Timer 2 Parameters Description .......................... 55
Table 16 Description of BVC Flow Control Parameters.......... 59
Table 17 EDGE Property Parameters Description................. 61
Table 18 Control Shelf Board Position ............................... 70
Table 19 Shelf Types ...................................................... 79
Table 20 Board Description ............................................. 79
Table 21 Resource Shelf Board Positioning......................... 80
Table 22 Frame Mode ..................................................... 83
Table 23 Trunk Group Information ................................... 86
Table 24 PCM Information Parameters .............................. 92
Table 25 Packet Switching Shelf....................................... 94
Table 26 GLI Board Parameters ....................................... 98
Table 27 CPU Information Parameters............................. 101
Table 28 Local Office Parameters ................................... 104
Table 29 Local No.7 SSN Parameters .............................. 106
Table 30 Adjacent Office Parameters .............................. 108
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

363

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Table 31 - Adjacent no 7 SSN Parameters .......................... 110


Table 32 NO.7 PCM Parameters ..................................... 112
Table 33 - Configuring No.7 Link Set Parameters ................ 113
Table 34 No 7 Link Parameters ...................................... 114
Table 35 No 7 Link Monitor Parameters ............................ 116
Table 36 No 7 Route Parameters .................................... 118
Table 37 - Creating No. 7 Office Parameters ....................... 119
Table 38 Application Server Basic Config Parameters ....... 120
Table 39 Application Server Parameters (ASP ID) ............. 122
Table 40 - Office Guide Configuration Parameters ............... 125
Table 41 Office Guide Configuration Parameters (Adjacent
Office ........................................................................... 126
Table 42 - ASP Configuration Parameters (Basic Config)....... 131
Table 43 ASP Configuration Parameters (Other Parameters)
................................................................................... 132
Table 44 ASP Configuration Parameters (IP Config) .......... 134
Table 45 - ASP Configuration Parameters (ASP Config) ........ 134
Table 46 M3UA Parameters ............................................ 136
Table 47 BRCH Parameters ............................................ 141
Table 48 NSVC Parameters ........................................... 144
Table 49 Create Site Parameters .................................... 147
Table 50 Site Parameters ............................................. 148
Table 51 ABIS Pool Parameters...................................... 156
Table 52 Panel Types ................................................... 158
Table 53 TRX Mode Parameters ..................................... 160
Table 54 CMM Board Parameters.................................... 169
Table 55 Create Interface Parameters............................. 193
Table 56 Inventory Unit Parameters ............................... 195
Table 57 Cell Basic Parameters 1 ................................... 199
Table 58 Cell Basic Parameters 2 ................................... 203
Table 59 Cell Basic Parameters 3 ................................... 205
Table 60 Optional Parameters........................................ 207
Table 61 Cell Selection Parameters................................. 209
Table 62 System Parameters ......................................... 212
Table 63 AMR Half Method Parameter ............................. 214
Table 64 AMR Full Method Parameters ............................ 217
Table 65 Cell Optional Parameters.................................. 219

364

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

AppendixB - Tables

Table 66 Cell Other Parameters ..................................... 220


Table 67 Service Process Additional Parameters ............... 223
Table 68 GPRS Basic Parameters.................................... 226
Table 69 GPRS Power Control Parameters ....................... 228
Table 70 GPRS Cell Reselection Parameters ..................... 229
Table 71 GPRS Channel Parameters................................ 233
Table 72 GPRS Other Parameters 1 ................................ 237
Table 73 GPRS Other Parameters 2 ................................ 240
Table 74 GPRS NC Survey Parameters ............................ 243
Table 75 GPRS Cell Optional Parameters ......................... 246
Table 76 EDGE Parameters............................................ 249
Table 77 TRX Frequency Info Parameters ........................ 252
Table 78 TRX Info Parameters ....................................... 253
Table 79 Channel Information........................................ 254
Table 80 TRX Info Parameters ....................................... 256
Table 81 Channel Information........................................ 257
Table 82 Frequency Hopping Parameters......................... 260
Table 83 Adjacent Cell Reselection Parameters................. 262
Table 84 Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters ................... 265
Table 85 Adjacent Cell Handover And Reselection Parameters
................................................................................... 270
Table 86 Adjacent Interference Cell Parameters ............... 275
Table 87 Modifying Power Control Parameters .................. 277
Table 88 Modifying Power Survey Parameters .................. 278
Table 89 Modifying Power Adjust Threshold Parameters..... 279
Table 90 Modifying Power Control Other Parameters ......... 280
Table 91 Modifying Cell Handover Control Parameters ....... 283
Table 92 Modifying Handover Control Other Parameters .... 285
Table 93 Modifying Handover Arithmetic Parameters ......... 286
Table 94 Modifying Handover Control Subcell Parameters .. 288
Table 95 Modifying Handover Control Pretreatment Parameters
................................................................................... 289
Table 96 Modifying Handover LEVEL Parameters............... 290
Table 97 Modifying Handover Condition Parameters .......... 292
Table 98 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Resection Parameters......... 294
Table 99 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover Parameters......... 296

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

365

NetNumenM32 (V1.00) INOS Operation Manual (Configuration Management)

Table 100 UTRAN Adjacent Cell Handover and Reselection


Parameters.................................................................... 298
Table 101 Modifying UTRAN Cell Control Parameters (Basic
Parameters 1)................................................................ 300
Table 102 Modifying UTRAN Cell Control Parameters (Basic
Parameters 2)................................................................ 303
Table 103 Modifying UTRAN Cell Control Parameters (GPRS
Parameters 1)................................................................ 304
Table 104 Modifying UTRAN Cell Control Parameters (GPRS
Parameters 2)................................................................ 306
Table 105 Modifying UTRAN Handover Control Parameters
(Basic Properties 1) ........................................................ 308
Table 106 Modifying UTRAN Handover Control Parameters
(Basic Properties 2) ........................................................ 310
Table 107 GERAN External Cell Parameters ..................... 312
Table 108 UTRAN External Cell Parameters...................... 314
Table 109 CLKG Board Alarm Parameters ........................ 318
Table 110 POWERB Alarm Parameters ............................ 321
Table 111 PSN Alarm Parameters ................................... 325
Table 112 Dry Contact Alarm Parameters ........................ 328
Table 113 Synchronizing Tables Parameters .................... 331

366

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

Index
B8112 AEM shelf ............... 163
BRP................................. 239
BVC flow control parameter .. 60
CCCH .............................. 241
cell selection parameters... 208,
210
CEU ................................ 158
Cn5, 42
Configuring Application Server
Process ........................ 130
Deleting BSC Board ............. 99
Dual carrier mode ............. 160
Dynamic HR ..................... 202
EAM ................................ 164
Internal Clock ............ 147, 149
IRC ................................. 160
Latitude ............................. 33
Longitude .......................... 33
MAC address .................... 193

Media Gateway................. 109


Net Clock.................. 147, 149
Nn .................................... 42
Odd carrier modes ............ 160
PBCCH ............................ 233
PCCCH ............................ 233
PDCH .............................. 233
power control parameters .. 242
PPCH .............................. 242
PRACH ............................ 233
PSI ................................. 239
PTCCH/U ......................... 247
RDU................................ 161
Serving Mobile Location Center
.................................. 109
SPAU ....................... 172, 174
SplitPgCycle ..................... 241
USF ................................ 233
Xn42

Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION

367

You might also like